TWI570539B - Protective cover arranged to protect a display of a tablet computer and method for manufacturing the same - Google Patents
Protective cover arranged to protect a display of a tablet computer and method for manufacturing the same Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- TWI570539B TWI570539B TW103145084A TW103145084A TWI570539B TW I570539 B TWI570539 B TW I570539B TW 103145084 A TW103145084 A TW 103145084A TW 103145084 A TW103145084 A TW 103145084A TW I570539 B TWI570539 B TW I570539B
- Authority
- TW
- Taiwan
- Prior art keywords
- magnetic
- electronic device
- attachment
- attachment feature
- display
- Prior art date
Links
Classifications
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
- G06F1/00—Details not covered by groups G06F3/00 - G06F13/00 and G06F21/00
- G06F1/16—Constructional details or arrangements
- G06F1/1613—Constructional details or arrangements for portable computers
- G06F1/1633—Constructional details or arrangements of portable computers not specific to the type of enclosures covered by groups G06F1/1615 - G06F1/1626
- G06F1/1675—Miscellaneous details related to the relative movement between the different enclosures or enclosure parts
- G06F1/1679—Miscellaneous details related to the relative movement between the different enclosures or enclosure parts for locking or maintaining the movable parts of the enclosure in a fixed position, e.g. latching mechanism at the edge of the display in a laptop or for the screen protective cover of a PDA
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
- G06F1/00—Details not covered by groups G06F3/00 - G06F13/00 and G06F21/00
- G06F1/16—Constructional details or arrangements
- G06F1/1613—Constructional details or arrangements for portable computers
- G06F1/1626—Constructional details or arrangements for portable computers with a single-body enclosure integrating a flat display, e.g. Personal Digital Assistants [PDAs]
-
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING; CALCULATING OR COUNTING
- G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
- G06F2200/00—Indexing scheme relating to G06F1/04 - G06F1/32
- G06F2200/16—Indexing scheme relating to G06F1/16 - G06F1/18
- G06F2200/163—Indexing scheme relating to constructional details of the computer
- G06F2200/1634—Integrated protective display lid, e.g. for touch-sensitive display in handheld computer
Landscapes
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
- Computer Hardware Design (AREA)
- Human Computer Interaction (AREA)
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Casings For Electric Apparatus (AREA)
- Telephone Set Structure (AREA)
- Controls And Circuits For Display Device (AREA)
Description
本案描述的實施例大體上係有關於可攜式電子裝置。更明確地,本案的實施例描述很適合可攜式電子裝置之各式可釋開的附著技術。 The embodiments described herein are generally related to portable electronic devices. More specifically, the embodiments of the present invention describe various releasable attachment techniques that are well suited for portable electronic devices.
在可攜式運算裝置中的最新發展包括了引進與Apple公司(設於美國加州Cupertino市)製造的iPadTM平板電腦有關之手持式電子裝置及運算平台。這些手持式運算裝置可被建構來讓該電子裝置的一大部分為用來呈現視覺內容之顯示器形式,只留很有限的可用空間給附著機構,該附著機構可被用來附裝配件裝置。 The latest development in portable computing device includes the introduction of Apple's (located in Cupertino, Calif.) Made about the Tablet PC iPad TM handheld electronic devices and computing platforms. These handheld computing devices can be constructed such that a large portion of the electronic device is in the form of a display for presenting visual content, leaving only a limited amount of available space for the attachment mechanism that can be used to attach the accessory device.
傳統的附著技術大體上係倚賴機械式緊固件,其典型地需要在該電子裝置上有至少一可從外部接近的附著特徵構造(attaching feature)用來與該配件裝置上的一對應的附著特徵構造相匹配。外部附著特徵構造的存在會讓該手持式運算裝置的整體外觀喪失吸引力並增加所不想要的(unwanted)重量及複雜度以及破壞該手持式運算裝置的外形。 Conventional attachment techniques generally rely on mechanical fasteners, which typically require at least one attachable feature that is accessible from the outside for attachment to a corresponding attachment feature on the accessory device. The construction matches. The presence of an externally attached feature configuration can detract from the overall appearance of the handheld computing device and increase the unwanted weight and complexity and damage the appearance of the handheld computing device.
因此,一種用來將至少兩個物件可釋開地附著在一起的機構是所想要的。 Therefore, a mechanism for releasably attaching at least two articles together is desirable.
本案描述與將配件可釋開地附著至電子裝置的系統、方法、及設 備有關的各式實施例。 Description of the present invention and systems, methods, and arrangements for releasably attaching an accessory to an electronic device Various embodiments are provided.
一種配件單元包括至少一配件本體及一磁性組件,其樞軸地連接至該配件本體。該磁性組件包括至少一第一多個磁性元件其以一第一相對尺寸大小沿著一第一直線被安排成彼此鄰接且根據交替磁極的一第一極性模式加以安排,及一第二多個磁性構件其以一第二相對尺寸大小沿著該第一直線被安排成彼此鄰接且根據交替磁極的一第二極性模式加以安排。 An accessory unit includes at least one accessory body and a magnetic component pivotally coupled to the accessory body. The magnetic assembly includes at least one first plurality of magnetic elements arranged along a first line along a first line and arranged in accordance with a first polarity pattern of alternating magnetic poles, and a second plurality of magnetic elements The members are arranged adjacent to each other along the first line in a second relative size and arranged in accordance with a second polarity pattern of alternating magnetic poles.
一種適合與一配件單元一起使用的磁性附著方法可藉由提供一磁性組件其中該磁性組件包括至少一第一多個磁性元件其以一第一相對尺寸大小沿著一第一直線被安排成彼此鄰接且根據交替磁極的一第一極性模式加以安排,及一第二多個磁性構件其以一第二相對尺寸大小沿著該第一直線被安排成彼此鄰接且根據交替磁極的一第二極性模式加以安排來實施,其中該第一及第二多個磁性元件合作以形成一第一磁性序列。在被描述的實施例中,該方法可藉由將該被序列地排列的磁性組件鄰近一主體單元放置,促使該主體單元產生一第一磁性表面,及在一對應於該磁性表面的嚙合表面磁性地附著該配件單元與該主體單元來實施。 A magnetic attachment method suitable for use with an accessory unit can be provided by providing a magnetic component wherein the magnetic component includes at least one first plurality of magnetic elements arranged adjacent to each other along a first straight line in a first relative size And arranged according to a first polarity pattern of the alternating magnetic poles, and a second plurality of magnetic members arranged along the first straight line in a second relative size to be adjacent to each other and according to a second polarity pattern of the alternating magnetic poles Arranged to be implemented wherein the first and second plurality of magnetic elements cooperate to form a first magnetic sequence. In the described embodiment, the method can cause the body unit to produce a first magnetic surface and a meshing surface corresponding to the magnetic surface by placing the sequentially arranged magnetic components adjacent to a body unit. The accessory unit is magnetically attached to the body unit for implementation.
在另一實施例中,一種配件單元包括至少一配件本體其具有一第一磁性元件及一第二磁性元件樞軸地連接至該配件本體,其中該第二磁性元件磁性地將該配件單元樞軸地附著至一主體單元的一第一部分及其中該第一磁性元件與該第二磁性元件合作用以將該配件本體磁性地附著至該主體單元的一第二部分,其中該第一及第二磁性單元係彼此獨立。 In another embodiment, an accessory unit includes at least one accessory body having a first magnetic component and a second magnetic component pivotally coupled to the accessory body, wherein the second magnetic component magnetically pivots the accessory component a first portion axially attached to a body unit and wherein the first magnetic element cooperates with the second magnetic element to magnetically attach the accessory body to a second portion of the body unit, wherein the first and the first The two magnetic units are independent of each other.
本發明的其它態樣及優點從下面配合附圖的詳細描述中變得很清楚,該等附圖以示範的方式例示被描述的實施例的原理。 Other aspects and advantages of the present invention will be apparent from the description of the appended claims.
10‧‧‧物件 10‧‧‧ objects
12‧‧‧電子裝置 12‧‧‧Electronic devices
15‧‧‧外殼 15‧‧‧Shell
17‧‧‧外殼 17‧‧‧Shell
13‧‧‧附著系統 13‧‧‧ Attachment system
14‧‧‧附著系統 14‧‧‧ Attachment system
13a‧‧‧附著特徵構造 13a‧‧‧Adhesive features
14a‧‧‧附著特徵構造 14a‧‧‧Adhesive features
13b‧‧‧附著特徵構造 13b‧‧‧Adhesive features
14b‧‧‧附著特徵構造 14b‧‧‧Adhesive features
16‧‧‧構件 16‧‧‧ components
18‧‧‧構件 18‧‧‧ components
20‧‧‧物件 20‧‧‧ objects
22‧‧‧電子裝置 22‧‧‧Electronic devices
24‧‧‧磁性表面 24‧‧‧ Magnetic surface
26‧‧‧嚙合表面 26‧‧‧ Engagement surface
30‧‧‧物件 30‧‧‧ objects
32‧‧‧電子裝置 32‧‧‧Electronic devices
34‧‧‧磁性附著系統 34‧‧‧Magnetic attachment system
36‧‧‧附著系統 36‧‧‧ Attachment system
38‧‧‧合作的系統 38‧‧‧Cooperative system
40‧‧‧物件 40‧‧‧ objects
42‧‧‧電子裝置 42‧‧‧Electronic devices
44‧‧‧磁性系統 44‧‧‧ Magnetic system
44a‧‧‧磁性元件 44a‧‧‧Magnetic components
44b‧‧‧磁性元件 44b‧‧‧Magnetic components
46‧‧‧合作的系統 46‧‧‧Cooperative system
50‧‧‧摺片 50‧‧‧Fold
52‧‧‧頂面(顯示器) 52‧‧‧Top (monitor)
48‧‧‧黏結件 48‧‧‧bonding parts
100‧‧‧電子裝置 100‧‧‧Electronic devices
102‧‧‧外殼 102‧‧‧Shell
104‧‧‧開口 104‧‧‧ openings
106‧‧‧防護層 106‧‧‧ protective layer
108‧‧‧第一磁性附著特徵構造 108‧‧‧First magnetic attachment feature
110‧‧‧第二磁性附著特徵構造 110‧‧‧Second magnetic attachment feature
102a‧‧‧側壁 102a‧‧‧ Sidewall
120b‧‧‧側壁 120b‧‧‧ side wall
102c‧‧‧側邊 102c‧‧‧ side
102d‧‧‧側邊 102d‧‧‧ side
112‧‧‧磁場 112‧‧‧ magnetic field
B112‧‧‧磁通量密度 B 112 ‧‧‧Magnetic flux density
Bthreshold‧‧‧磁通量密度門檻值 B threshold ‧‧‧magnetic flux threshold
116‧‧‧磁性元件 116‧‧‧Magnetic components
118‧‧‧霍耳效應感測器 118‧‧‧Horse effect sensor
120‧‧‧羅盤 120‧‧‧ compass
126‧‧‧磁性元件 126‧‧‧ Magnetic components
128‧‧‧磁性元件 128‧‧‧Magnetic components
200‧‧‧物件(配件裝置) 200‧‧‧ Objects (accessory devices)
202‧‧‧磁性附著特徵構造 202‧‧‧Magnetic attachment features
208‧‧‧磁場 208‧‧‧ magnetic field
204‧‧‧磁性元件 204‧‧‧Magnetic components
206‧‧‧磁性元件 206‧‧‧Magnetic components
216‧‧‧磁性附著特徵構造 216‧‧‧Magnetic attachment features
214‧‧‧區域 214‧‧‧Area
218‧‧‧嚙合表面 218‧‧‧ meshing surface
300‧‧‧合作的系統 300‧‧‧Cooperative system
402‧‧‧磁性元件 402‧‧‧Magnetic components
404‧‧‧突出部 404‧‧‧Protruding
410‧‧‧磁性元件 410‧‧‧Magnetic components
414‧‧‧磁性元件 414‧‧‧Magnetic components
500‧‧‧磁性附著特徵構造 500‧‧‧Magnetic attachment features
502‧‧‧磁性元件 502‧‧‧ Magnetic components
506‧‧‧物件 506‧‧‧ objects
600‧‧‧裝置附著特徵構造 600‧‧‧Device attachment features
602‧‧‧磁性元件 602‧‧‧ Magnetic components
604‧‧‧磁性元件 604‧‧‧Magnetic components
606‧‧‧彈簧 606‧‧ ‧ spring
608‧‧‧彈簧 608‧‧ ‧ spring
700‧‧‧裝置附著特徵構造 700‧‧‧Device attachment features
702‧‧‧磁性組件 702‧‧‧ Magnetic components
712a‧‧‧磁鐵 712a‧‧‧ Magnet
712b‧‧‧磁鐵 712b‧‧‧ magnet
712c‧‧‧磁鐵 712c‧‧‧ Magnet
714a‧‧‧磁鐵 714a‧‧‧ Magnet
714b‧‧‧磁鐵 714b‧‧‧ magnet
714c‧‧‧磁鐵 714c‧‧‧ Magnet
800‧‧‧配件附著特徵構造 800‧‧‧Accessory attachment features
802‧‧‧磁性組件 802‧‧‧ magnetic components
802a‧‧‧磁鐵 802a‧‧‧ magnet
802b‧‧‧磁鐵 802b‧‧‧ magnet
802c‧‧‧磁鐵 802c‧‧‧ magnet
804a‧‧‧磁鐵 804a‧‧‧ Magnet
804b‧‧‧磁鐵 804b‧‧‧ magnet
804c‧‧‧磁鐵 804c‧‧‧ magnet
716‧‧‧中心線 716‧‧‧ center line
900‧‧‧圖表 900‧‧‧Chart
1000‧‧‧配置 1000‧‧‧Configuration
1002‧‧‧配置 1002‧‧‧Configuration
1004‧‧‧經過編碼的磁性序列 1004‧‧‧ Coded magnetic sequence
1200‧‧‧蓋子組件 1200‧‧‧Cover assembly
1100‧‧‧平板裝置 1100‧‧‧ tablet device
1102‧‧‧外殼 1102‧‧‧ Shell
1104‧‧‧開口 1104‧‧‧ openings
1106‧‧‧覆蓋玻璃 1106‧‧‧ Covering glass
1108‧‧‧資料埠 1108‧‧‧Information埠
1112‧‧‧主頁按鈕 1112‧‧‧Home button
1202‧‧‧摺片 1202‧‧‧Fold
1204‧‧‧鉸鏈組件 1204‧‧‧Hinge assembly
1206‧‧‧內層 1206‧‧‧ inner layer
1300‧‧‧片段式蓋子組件 1300‧‧‧ Fragmented lid assembly
1302‧‧‧本體 1302‧‧‧ Ontology
1304‧‧‧片段 1304‧‧‧frag
1305‧‧‧片段 1305‧‧‧frag
1306‧‧‧片段 1306‧‧‧frag
1307‧‧‧片段 1307‧‧‧frag
1308‧‧‧片段 1308‧‧‧frag
1309‧‧‧片段 1309‧‧‧frag
1310‧‧‧片段 1310‧‧‧frag
1312‧‧‧可摺疊的部分 1312‧‧‧Foldable parts
1314‧‧‧插入件 1314‧‧‧ Inserts
1316‧‧‧插入件 1316‧‧‧ Inserts
1318‧‧‧插入件 1318‧‧‧ Inserts
1320‧‧‧插入件 1320‧‧‧ Inserts
1322‧‧‧磁性元件 1322‧‧‧Magnetic components
1324‧‧‧插入件 1324‧‧‧ Inserts
1328‧‧‧第一端凸部 1328‧‧‧First end projection
1330‧‧‧第二端凸部 1330‧‧‧second end projection
1332‧‧‧連接桿 1332‧‧‧ Connecting rod
1333‧‧‧樞轉軸線 1333‧‧‧ pivot axis
1336‧‧‧保護層 1336‧‧‧Protective layer
1338‧‧‧保護層 1338‧‧‧Protective layer
1340‧‧‧鉸鏈跨距件 1340‧‧‧Hinge span
1342‧‧‧鉸鏈柱 1342‧‧‧Hinged column
1344‧‧‧保護層(標籤) 1344‧‧‧Protective layer (label)
1400‧‧‧鉸鏈跨距件 1400‧‧‧Hinged span parts
1402‧‧‧磁性元件 1402‧‧‧Magnetic components
1404‧‧‧填料材料 1404‧‧‧Filling materials
1410‧‧‧鉸鏈跨距件 1410‧‧‧Hinge span
1412‧‧‧端部 1412‧‧‧End
1414‧‧‧間隔件 1414‧‧‧ spacers
1500‧‧‧鉸鏈跨距件的剖面側視圖 Sectional view of the 1500‧‧‧ hinge span
1502‧‧‧磁性元件 1502‧‧‧Magnetic components
1504‧‧‧磁性元件 1504‧‧‧Magnetic components
1506‧‧‧內表面 1506‧‧‧ inner surface
1508‧‧‧外表面 1508‧‧‧ outer surface
1510‧‧‧分磁器 1510‧‧‧Separator
1512‧‧‧外殼 1512‧‧‧ Shell
1550‧‧‧鉸鏈跨距件的剖面側視圖 Sectional view of the 1550‧‧‧ hinge span
1554‧‧‧磁鐵 1554‧‧‧ Magnet
1600‧‧‧夾具 1600‧‧‧ fixture
1602‧‧‧表面 1602‧‧‧ surface
1700‧‧‧三角形支撐結構 1700‧‧‧Triangular support structure
1702‧‧‧觸碰敏感表面 1702‧‧‧Touch sensitive surface
1900‧‧‧懸掛件 1900‧‧‧ hanging parts
1910‧‧‧懸掛件 1910‧‧‧ hanging parts
2000‧‧‧配置 2000‧‧‧Configuration
2002‧‧‧面向前方的照相機 2002‧‧‧Front facing camera
2004‧‧‧面向前方的照相機 2004‧‧‧Front facing camera
2100‧‧‧蓋子組件的組態 2100‧‧‧ Configuration of the cover assembly
2102‧‧‧外露的部分 2102‧‧‧Exposed parts
2104‧‧‧圖像 2104‧‧‧ Images
2106‧‧‧第二部分 2106‧‧‧Part II
2108‧‧‧圖像 2108‧‧‧ Images
2200‧‧‧蓋子組件 2200‧‧‧Cover assembly
2202‧‧‧片段式蓋子組件 2202‧‧‧Fragmented lid assembly
2204‧‧‧樞轉組件 2204‧‧‧ pivoting components
2206‧‧‧端凸部 2206‧‧‧End convex
2208‧‧‧端凸部 2208‧‧‧End convex
2210‧‧‧鉸鏈跨距件 2210‧‧‧Hinge span
2212‧‧‧連接桿 2212‧‧‧ Connecting rod
2214‧‧‧套管 2214‧‧‧ casing
2216‧‧‧樞轉軸線 2216‧‧‧ pivot axis
2218‧‧‧樞轉軸線 2218‧‧‧ pivot axis
2220‧‧‧標籤 2220‧‧‧ label
2222‧‧‧緩衝器 2222‧‧‧buffer
2224‧‧‧端銷 2224‧‧‧End sales
2226‧‧‧端銷 2226‧‧‧End sales
2228‧‧‧磁性元件 2228‧‧‧Magnetic components
2228-1‧‧‧磁性元件 2228-1‧‧‧Magnetic components
2228-2‧‧‧磁性元件 2228-2‧‧‧Magnetic components
2232-1‧‧‧插塞 2232-1‧‧‧ plug
2232-2‧‧‧插塞 2232-2‧‧‧ plug
2228-3‧‧‧磁鐵 2228-3‧‧‧ Magnet
2228-4‧‧‧磁鐵 2228-4‧‧‧ Magnet
2234‧‧‧間隔件 2234‧‧‧ spacers
2236‧‧‧分磁器 2236‧‧‧Separator
2238‧‧‧開口 2238‧‧‧ openings
2250‧‧‧底層 2250‧‧‧ bottom layer
2252‧‧‧強化層 2252‧‧‧ Strengthening layer
2254‧‧‧插入件 2254‧‧‧ Inserts
2256‧‧‧黏劑層 2256‧‧‧Adhesive layer
2258‧‧‧層疊材料 2258‧‧‧Laminated materials
2254-1‧‧‧插入件 2254-1‧‧‧ inserts
2260‧‧‧磁鐵 2260‧‧‧ Magnet
2260-1‧‧‧磁鐵 2260-1‧‧‧ Magnet
2254-2‧‧‧片段 2254-2‧‧‧frag
2262‧‧‧作用板 2262‧‧‧ action board
2264‧‧‧頂層 2264‧‧‧ top
2266‧‧‧強化桿 2266‧‧‧ Strengthening rod
2300‧‧‧裝置附著特徵構造 2300‧‧‧Device attachment features
2302‧‧‧磁性元件 2302‧‧‧Magnetic components
2304‧‧‧分磁器 2304‧‧‧Separator
2306‧‧‧嚙合表面 2306‧‧‧Mapping surface
2308‧‧‧桶 2308‧‧‧ barrel
2400‧‧‧附著特徵構造 2400‧‧‧Adhesive features
2402‧‧‧磁性元件 2402‧‧‧Magnetic components
2404‧‧‧分磁器 2404‧‧‧Separator
2406‧‧‧板片彈簧 2406‧‧‧ plate spring
2408‧‧‧緊束件 2408‧‧‧tight parts
2410‧‧‧端支撐件 2410‧‧‧End support
2412‧‧‧緊束件 2412‧‧‧tight parts
2414‧‧‧對準柱 2414‧‧‧Alignment column
2500‧‧‧處理 2500‧‧‧Process
2600‧‧‧處理 2600‧‧‧Process
2700‧‧‧處理 2700‧‧‧Process
2800‧‧‧偷窺模式處理 2800‧‧‧Peeping mode processing
2900‧‧‧處理 2900‧‧‧Process
3000‧‧‧處理 3000‧‧‧Process
3100‧‧‧功能模組的配置 3100‧‧‧Configuration of function modules
3102‧‧‧電子裝置 3102‧‧‧Electronic devices
3104‧‧‧資料儲存器 3104‧‧‧Data storage
3106‧‧‧GUI管理器 3106‧‧‧GUI Manager
3108‧‧‧通信模組 3108‧‧‧Communication Module
3110‧‧‧配件管理器 3110‧‧‧Accessory Manager
3150‧‧‧電子裝置 3150‧‧‧Electronic devices
3152‧‧‧處理器 3152‧‧‧ Processor
3154‧‧‧檔案系統 3154‧‧‧File System
3156‧‧‧快取記憶體 3156‧‧‧Cache memory
3174‧‧‧電池組 3174‧‧‧Battery Pack
3170‧‧‧RAM 3170‧‧‧RAM
3172‧‧‧ROM 3172‧‧‧ROM
3158‧‧‧輸入裝置 3158‧‧‧Input device
3160‧‧‧顯示器 3160‧‧‧ display
3163‧‧‧編碼器/解碼器(CODEC) 3163‧‧‧Encoder/Decoder (CODEC)
3164‧‧‧揚聲器 3164‧‧‧Speakers
3161‧‧‧網路/匯流排界面 3161‧‧‧Network/Bus Interface
3162‧‧‧資料鏈 3162‧‧‧Information chain
3176‧‧‧感測器 3176‧‧‧ Sensor
3166‧‧‧資料匯流排 3166‧‧‧ data bus
本發明藉由下面配合附圖的詳細描述將可很容易被瞭解,其中相同的標號標示相同的結構元件,及其中:圖1為可用一種所想要的且可重複的方式彼此可釋開地附著的一物件與一電子裝置的簡化方塊圖。 The invention will be readily understood by the following detailed description of the drawings, wherein the same reference numerals are used to refer to the same structural elements, and wherein: Figure 1 is releasable in a desired and repeatable manner. A simplified block diagram of an attached object and an electronic device.
圖2A為依據一被描述的實施例的一物件的簡化立體圖,該物件可藉由一側邊磁性附著系統而被可釋開地附著至一電子裝置。 2A is a simplified perspective view of an article in accordance with a described embodiment that is releasably attached to an electronic device by a side magnetic attachment system.
圖2B顯示圖2A的該物件及該電子裝置依據該側邊磁性附著系統被附著在一起。 2B shows the article of FIG. 2A and the electronic device being attached together in accordance with the side magnetic attachment system.
圖3A為一藉由一依據一被描述的實施例之頂部磁性附著系統而被可釋開地附著至一電子裝置的物件的簡化立體圖。 3A is a simplified perspective view of an article releasably attached to an electronic device by a top magnetic attachment system in accordance with an described embodiment.
圖3B顯示圖3A的該物件及該電子裝置使用該頂部磁性附著系統而彼此被磁性地附著在一起以形成一對應的系統。 3B shows the article of FIG. 3A and the electronic device being magnetically attached to each other using the top magnetic attachment system to form a corresponding system.
圖4A為一藉由該頂部磁性附著系統而被可釋開地附著至一電子裝置的物件的簡化立體圖。 4A is a simplified perspective view of an article releasably attached to an electronic device by the top magnetic attachment system.
圖4B顯示在閉合形態之圖4A的該被附著的物件與該電子裝置的一對應的系統。 Figure 4B shows a system of the attached article of Figure 4A in a closed configuration corresponding to the electronic device.
圖4C顯示圖4B的該對應的系統在打開的形態。 Figure 4C shows the configuration of the corresponding system of Figure 4B in an open state.
圖5顯示依據被描述的實施例的一電子裝置的一頂視立體圖。 Figure 5 shows a top perspective view of an electronic device in accordance with the described embodiment.
圖6顯示一磁性附著特徵構造的另一實施例。 Figure 6 shows another embodiment of a magnetic attachment feature configuration.
圖7A顯示一電子裝置其鄰近一具有磁性附著特徵構造之附件形式的另一物件。 Figure 7A shows another electronic device in the form of an accessory in the form of an attachment having a magnetic attachment feature.
圖7B顯示依據被描述的實施例之圖7A的電子裝置與配件裝置之間的磁性相互作用的圖像表示。 Figure 7B shows an image representation of the magnetic interaction between the electronic device and the accessory device of Figure 7A in accordance with the described embodiment.
圖7C顯示藉由圖7A及7B中的配件裝置與電子裝置的磁性附著而形成的一合作的系統的圖像表示。 Figure 7C shows an image representation of a cooperative system formed by the magnetic attachment of the accessory device and the electronic device of Figures 7A and 7B.
圖8A顯示一電子裝置中之附著特徵構造的一實施例。 Figure 8A shows an embodiment of an attachment feature configuration in an electronic device.
圖8B顯示在一配件裝置中與圖8A的附著特徵構造相對應的一附著特徵構造的一實施例。 Figure 8B shows an embodiment of an attachment feature configuration corresponding to the attachment feature configuration of Figure 8A in an accessory device.
圖9A顯示一在不作用的(inactive)狀態中之代表面性裝置附著特徵構造。 Figure 9A shows a representative planar device attachment feature configuration in an inactive state.
圖9B顯示圖9A的該代表性裝置附著特徵構造被另一磁性附著特徵構造作動的情形。 Figure 9B shows the situation in which the representative device attachment feature configuration of Figure 9A is actuated by another magnetic attachment feature.
圖9C顯示在該磁性作用物件在場的情形下該磁性附著特徵構造在不作用的狀態。 Fig. 9C shows the magnetic attachment feature configuration in an inactive state in the presence of the magnetically active object.
圖10顯示一利用一板片彈簧配置來作為一固定機構的裝置附著特徵構造的實施例。 Figure 10 shows an embodiment of a device attachment feature configuration utilizing a leaf spring configuration as a securing mechanism.
圖11A顯示一在不作用的狀態之鍵式(keyed)磁性附著系統及一相匹配的磁性附著系統的實施例。 Figure 11A shows an embodiment of a keyed magnetic attachment system and a matched magnetic attachment system in an inactive state.
圖11B顯示圖11A的該鍵式磁性附著系統被該相匹配的磁性附著系統作動的情形。 Figure 11B shows the situation in which the bonded magnetic attachment system of Figure 11A is actuated by the mating magnetic attachment system.
圖12顯示一用於圖11A的該鍵式磁性附著系統的偏移位置。 Figure 12 shows an offset position for the keyed magnetic attachment system of Figure 11A.
圖13顯示一圖表其顯示出磁性附著力與該鍵式磁性附著特徵構造的相對位置之間的關係。 Figure 13 shows a graph showing the relationship between magnetic adhesion and the relative position of the bonded magnetic attachment feature.
圖14與15顯示使用於該鍵式磁性附著特徵構造內的磁性元件的不同實施例。 Figures 14 and 15 show different embodiments of magnetic elements used in the keyed magnetic attachment feature configuration.
圖16A顯示一平板裝置(tablet device)形式的電子裝置與一保護蓋形式的配件裝置的第一立體圖。 Figure 16A shows a first perspective view of an electronic device in the form of a tablet device and an accessory device in the form of a protective cover.
圖16B顯示一平板裝置(tablet device)形式的電子裝置與一保護蓋形式的配件裝置的第二立體圖。 Figure 16B shows a second perspective view of an electronic device in the form of a tablet device and an accessory device in the form of a protective cover.
圖17A顯示由圖16A及16B所示之平板裝置與配件裝置所形成的該合作的系統(cooperate system)在蓋合組態的狀態。 Fig. 17A shows the state in which the cooperate system formed by the tablet device and the accessory device shown in Figs. 16A and 16B is in a closed configuration.
圖17B顯示圖17A所示的該合作的系統在打開組態的狀態。 Fig. 17B shows the state in which the cooperative system shown in Fig. 17A is in the open configuration.
圖18顯示一區段式外蓋組件的實施例的頂式圖。 Figure 18 shows a top view of an embodiment of a segmented outer cover assembly.
圖19A-19C顯示依據所描述的實施例的一鉸鏈跨距件(hinge span)的細部圖式。 19A-19C show a detailed view of a hinge span in accordance with the described embodiment.
圖20A顯示圖18所示的區段式外蓋組件附著至一平板裝置的側視圖。 Figure 20A shows a side view of the segmented outer cover assembly of Figure 18 attached to a tablet device.
圖20A-20C顯示圖20A的該區段式外蓋組件與該平板裝置的剖面圖。 20A-20C show cross-sectional views of the segmented outer cover assembly of Fig. 20A and the tablet device.
圖21A顯示磁性地附著至一具有曲面的外殼之圖19A-19C的該鉸鏈跨距件的實施例的剖面側視圖。 Figure 21A shows a cross-sectional side view of an embodiment of the hinge span of Figures 19A-19C magnetically attached to a curved outer casing.
圖21B顯示磁性地附著至一具有平的表面的外殼之該鉸鏈跨距件的另一實施例的剖面側視圖。 Figure 21B shows a cross-sectional side view of another embodiment of the hinge span that is magnetically attached to a housing having a flat surface.
圖22A及22B顯示一用來組裝該依據被描述的實施例的鉸鏈跨距件的固定件的剖面圖及立體圖。 22A and 22B show a cross-sectional view and a perspective view of a fixture for assembling the hinge span member in accordance with the described embodiment.
圖23顯示一被建構來將一平板裝置支撐成鍵盤狀態的區段式外蓋的側視圖。 Figure 23 shows a side view of a segmented cover constructed to support a tablet device in a keyboard state.
圖24A及24B分別顯示該被建構來將一平板裝置支撐成鍵盤狀態的區段式外蓋的側視圖及立體圖。 24A and 24B are respectively side and perspective views of the segmented outer cover constructed to support a tablet device in a keyboard state.
圖25A-25B顯示被建構成一懸掛設備的不同實施例的該區段式外蓋組件。 Figures 25A-25B show the segmented outer cover assembly constructed to form a different embodiment of a suspension device.
圖26A及26B分別顯示一具有前及後影像攝取裝置之平板裝置的前視及後視圖。 26A and 26B show front and rear views, respectively, of a tablet device having front and rear image pickup devices.
圖27A-27C顯示一在偷窺模式中之一區段式外蓋及平板裝置的合作的系統,其被建構來只啟動一顯示器之被掀開的部分。 27A-27C show a cooperative system of a segmented cover and tablet device in a voyeur mode that is configured to activate only the cleaved portion of a display.
圖28A-28D顯示依據被描述的實施例的一樞接鉸鏈組件的各種分解圖。 28A-28D show various exploded views of a pivot joint assembly in accordance with the described embodiment.
圖29顯示依據被描述的實施例的一上蓋組件的分解圖。 Figure 29 shows an exploded view of an upper cover assembly in accordance with the described embodiment.
圖30為圖29所示的該上蓋組件在一平板裝置上的剖面圖,其詳示一嵌埋在該上蓋組件內的磁鐵與該平板裝置內的磁性敏感電路之間的關係。 Figure 30 is a cross-sectional view of the upper cover assembly of Figure 29 on a flat panel assembly detailing the relationship between a magnet embedded in the upper cover assembly and a magnetic sensitive circuit within the flat panel assembly.
圖31A顯示一依據被描述的實施例之與處在有作用的狀態中的相對應的裝置附著特徵構造磁性地嚙合的鉸鏈跨距件的剖面圖。 Figure 31A shows a cross-sectional view of a hinge span that is magnetically engaged with a corresponding device attachment feature in an active state in accordance with the described embodiment.
圖31B顯示圖31A的該裝置附著特徵構造處在一不作用的(inactive)狀態中之剖面圖。 Figure 31B shows a cross-sectional view of the device attachment feature configuration of Figure 31A in an inactive state.
圖32-33顯示一依據被描述的實施例之包含一板片彈簧作為固定機構的裝置附著特徵構造的立體圖。 32-33 show perspective views of a device attachment feature configuration including a leaf spring as a securing mechanism in accordance with the described embodiment.
圖34顯示一流程圖其詳述依據被描述的實施例的一磁性附著的處理。 Figure 34 shows a flow chart detailing a magnetic attachment process in accordance with the described embodiment.
圖35顯示一流程圖其詳述依據被描述的實施例的一用來作動一被編碼的磁性附著特徵構造的處理。 Figure 35 shows a flow chart detailing a process for actuating a coded magnetic attachment feature in accordance with the described embodiment.
圖36顯示一流程圖其詳述依據被描述的實施例的一用來形成初始化一磁性附著的處理。 Figure 36 shows a flow chart detailing a process for forming an initialization-magnetic attachment in accordance with the described embodiment.
圖37顯示一流程圖其詳述依據被描述的實施例的一用於偷窺模式的處理。 Figure 37 shows a flow chart detailing a process for a voyeur mode in accordance with the described embodiment.
圖38顯示一流程圖其詳述依據被描述的實施例的一用來組裝一鉸鏈跨距件的處理。 Figure 38 shows a flow chart detailing a process for assembling a hinge span in accordance with the described embodiment.
圖39顯示一流程圖其詳述依據被描述的實施例的一用來決定在一被用於磁性附著系統中的磁性堆內的磁性元件的組態的處理。 Figure 39 shows a flow chart detailing a process for determining the configuration of a magnetic element within a magnetic stack used in a magnetic attachment system in accordance with the described embodiment.
圖40為一可攜式媒體裝置所使用的功能性模組的配置的方塊圖。 40 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a functional module used in a portable media device.
圖41為一適合與被描述的實施例一起使用的電子裝置的方塊圖。 Figure 41 is a block diagram of an electronic device suitable for use with the described embodiments.
現將詳細參考附圖中所示的代表性實施例。應被理解的是,下面的描述並不要將該等實施例限制到一較佳的實施例。相反地,這些說 明是要涵蓋可被包括在申請專利範圍所界定的該等被描述的實施例的精神與範圍內的替代方案、變化及等效物。 Reference will now be made in detail to the exemplary embodiments illustrated in the drawings. It should be understood that the following description is not intended to limit the embodiments to a preferred embodiment. On the contrary, these say The alternatives, variations and equivalents are intended to be included within the spirit and scope of the described embodiments as defined by the appended claims.
下面的描述大體上與一可被用來將至少兩個被適當地建構的物件附著在一起的機構有關。在一實施例中,這可在無需使用到傳統的緊固件下達成。該等物件的每一者可包括一被設置來提供一具有適當的特性的磁場的附著特徵構造。當該附著特徵構造被放置成彼此近接時,該等磁場可根據它們各自的特性合作地相互作用,讓該等物件以一種所想要的且可重覆的方式彼此磁性地附著。例如,至少部分因為磁場的合作性的相互作用的本質,該等物件可在沒有外部的介入干預之下彼此附著於一預定的位置及相對方位。例如,該合作性的磁性相互作用可造成該等物件自行對準及自行定心於一所想要的方位上的結果。 The following description generally relates to a mechanism that can be used to attach at least two suitably constructed items together. In an embodiment, this can be achieved without the use of conventional fasteners. Each of the items may include an attachment feature configured to provide a magnetic field having appropriate characteristics. When the attachment features are placed in close proximity to each other, the magnetic fields can cooperatively interact according to their respective characteristics, allowing the objects to magnetically attach to each other in a desired and reproducible manner. For example, due at least in part to the nature of the cooperative interaction of the magnetic fields, the objects can be attached to each other in a predetermined position and relative orientation without external interventional intervention. For example, the cooperative magnetic interaction can result in self-alignment of the objects and self-centering in a desired orientation.
該等物件可保持在一磁性附著的狀態,直到一足以克服整體的淨吸附磁力之夠大的釋開力量被施加為止。然而,在某些情形中,希望能夠依序地分離該等物件(譬如像是拉鏈之類者),在此情形中,該釋開力量每一次只需要大到足以克服一對磁性元件的淨磁吸力即可。不需要連接器,譬如機械式緊固件,來將該等物件附著在一起。再者,為了防止對該等磁性附著特徵構造之間的磁性相互作用有不當的干擾,該等物件在該等磁性附著特徵構造附近的至少一部分可用無磁性作用的材料,譬如塑膠,或不含鐵的金屬,譬如鋁或非磁性不銹鋼,製成。 The articles can remain in a magnetically attached state until a sufficient release force sufficient to overcome the overall net adsorption magnetic force is applied. However, in some cases it may be desirable to be able to separate the objects sequentially (such as, for example, a zipper), in which case the release force only needs to be large enough to overcome the net of a pair of magnetic elements each time. Magnetic attraction is enough. No connectors, such as mechanical fasteners, are required to attach the items together. Furthermore, in order to prevent undue interference with the magnetic interaction between the magnetic attachment features, at least a portion of the objects in the vicinity of the magnetic attachment features may be made of a non-magnetic material, such as plastic, or Made of iron metal, such as aluminum or non-magnetic stainless steel.
該等物件可以有許多形式且實施許多功能。當該等物件彼此磁性地附著時,它們可彼此通信且互動以形成一合作系統(cooperative system)。該合作系統可實施操作並提供分開的個別物件所無法提供的功能。在另一實施例中,至少一裝置可被用作為配件裝置。該配件裝置可被磁性地附著到至少一電子裝置。該配件裝置可提供可被用來 強化該電子裝置的操作性的服務及功能。例如,該配件裝置可以是一可磁性地附著至該電子裝置之保護蓋的形式。該保護蓋可在提高該電子裝置的整體外觀及質感的同時對該電子裝置的某些部分(譬如,顯示器)提供保護。該被用來將該配件裝置與該電子裝置磁性地附著在一起的磁性附著機構可確保該保護蓋可以一特定的方位附著至該電子裝置。再者,該磁性附著機構亦可確保該保護蓋與該電子裝置的適當對準及定位。 The objects can take many forms and perform many functions. When the objects are magnetically attached to each other, they can communicate with each other and interact to form a cooperative system. The collaborative system can perform operations and provide functions that are not possible with separate individual items. In another embodiment, at least one device can be used as an accessory device. The accessory device can be magnetically attached to at least one electronic device. The accessory device can be provided to be used Services and functions that enhance the operability of the electronic device. For example, the accessory device can be in the form of a protective cover that is magnetically attached to the electronic device. The protective cover can provide protection to certain parts of the electronic device, such as a display, while improving the overall appearance and texture of the electronic device. The magnetic attachment mechanism used to magnetically attach the accessory device to the electronic device ensures that the protective cover can be attached to the electronic device in a particular orientation. Moreover, the magnetic attachment mechanism can also ensure proper alignment and positioning of the protective cover with the electronic device.
該保護蓋可包括至少一鉸鏈部分。該鉸鏈部分可藉由使用一磁性附著特徵構造而被磁性地附著至該電子裝置。該鉸鏈部分可被樞軸地連接至一摺片(flap)其被設置在該電子裝置的一個需要被保護的部分上。該保護蓋可包括能夠與該電子裝置內的電子元件合作的電子電路或其它(被動或主動)元件。訊號可被傳送於該保護蓋與該電子裝置之間以作為該合作的一部分,該等訊號可被用來更改該電子裝置的操作、該保護蓋的電子電路或元件的操作、及其它等等。 The protective cover can include at least one hinge portion. The hinge portion can be magnetically attached to the electronic device by using a magnetic attachment feature configuration. The hinge portion can be pivotally coupled to a flap that is disposed on a portion of the electronic device that needs to be protected. The protective cover can include an electronic circuit or other (passive or active) component that can cooperate with electronic components within the electronic device. The signal can be transmitted between the protective cover and the electronic device as part of the cooperation, the signals can be used to modify the operation of the electronic device, the operation of the electronic circuit or component of the protective cover, and the like, etc. .
作為一個例子,該電子裝置可包括一磁性敏感電路,譬如霍耳效應(Hall Effect)感測器,因而可偵測一磁場的存在。該霍耳效應感測器可藉由產生一訊號來作為對一磁場存在(或不存在)的反應。該訊號可被用來改變該電子裝置的操作狀態。因此,該保護蓋可包括一磁性元件,譬如一具有可造成該霍耳效應感測器產生訊號的磁場的永久磁鐵。該磁性元件可被設置在該保護蓋上的一個當該保護蓋被放置在該電子裝置的一表面上或緊鄰該表面時可觸動該霍耳效應感測器產生該訊號的位置處。該訊號可指出該保護蓋位在相對於該電子裝置的一個可以造成該電子裝置的操作狀態改變的預定的位置。例如,當該保護蓋具有該磁性元件的部分緊鄰該霍耳效應感測器時,來自該磁性元件的磁場會造成該霍耳效應感測器產生一訊號。該訊號可被用來將該操作狀態改變為與該電子裝置的顯示器被完全覆蓋相符的狀態。在另一 方面,當該保護蓋具有該磁性元件的部分被移開至該霍耳效應感測器不再會對該磁性元件的磁場有反應的地點時,該霍耳效應感測器可產生另一訊號。該另一訊號可讓該電子裝置進入該顯示器的至少一部分被掀開且可看到之另一個不同的操作狀態。 As an example, the electronic device can include a magnetic sensitive circuit, such as a Hall Effect sensor, to detect the presence of a magnetic field. The Hall effect sensor can generate a signal as a reaction to the presence (or absence) of a magnetic field. The signal can be used to change the operational state of the electronic device. Thus, the protective cover can include a magnetic element, such as a permanent magnet having a magnetic field that can cause the Hall effect sensor to generate a signal. The magnetic element can be disposed on the protective cover at a position where the protective cover is placed on or adjacent to a surface of the electronic device to activate the signal generated by the Hall effect sensor. The signal can indicate that the protective cover is in a predetermined position relative to the electronic device that can cause a change in the operational state of the electronic device. For example, when the protective cover has a portion of the magnetic element in close proximity to the Hall effect sensor, a magnetic field from the magnetic element causes the Hall effect sensor to generate a signal. The signal can be used to change the operational state to a state consistent with the full coverage of the display of the electronic device. In another In one aspect, the Hall effect sensor can generate another signal when the protective cover has a portion of the magnetic element that is removed to a location where the Hall effect sensor no longer reacts to the magnetic field of the magnetic element. . The other signal allows the electronic device to enter a different operational state in which at least a portion of the display is cleaved and visible.
這些及其它的實施例係參考圖1-40在下文中被討論。然而,熟習此技藝者將可瞭解的是,在本文中被提供之關於這些圖式的細部描述只是為了說明的目的,其不應被解讀為是對本發明的限制。關於此討論的其餘部分,將描述依據被描述的實施例被適當地建構來彼此磁性地附著在一起的第一及第二物件。應指出的是,任何數量及類型之被適當地建構的物件都可以精確且可重覆的方式被磁性地彼此附著。詳言之,為了簡化及清楚起見,關於此討論的其餘部分,該第一物件被假定為一電子裝置的形式且特別是一種手持式電子裝置。 These and other embodiments are discussed below with reference to Figures 1-40. It is to be understood that the detailed description of the drawings, which are set forth herein, are not intended to be construed as limiting. With regard to the remainder of this discussion, first and second articles that are suitably constructed in accordance with the described embodiments to be magnetically attached to each other will be described. It should be noted that any number and type of suitably constructed articles can be magnetically attached to one another in a precise and repeatable manner. In particular, for the sake of simplicity and clarity, with regard to the remainder of this discussion, the first object is assumed to be in the form of an electronic device and in particular a handheld electronic device.
圖1為以一種所想要的且可重覆的方式彼此可釋開地附著在一起的物件10與電子裝置12的一簡化的方塊圖。詳言之,物件10與電子裝置12可在沒有外部介入干預及沒有使用機械式緊固件下在預定的位置及相對的方位彼此附著在一起。該物件10與電子裝置12可保持彼此附著在一起直到一可克服它們之間的嚙合的釋開力量被施加為止。然而,在某些情形中,將該物件10與電子裝置12(如拉鏈之類者)依序地分開是所想要的,在此情形中,一能夠解開該物件10與電子裝置12之間的嚙合的釋開力量每次被施加於一附著構件附近。例如,一附著構件可包括一被適當地匹配的磁性元件對,一個磁性元件在物件10中及另一個磁性元件在該電子裝置12中。 1 is a simplified block diagram of an article 10 and an electronic device 12 that are releasably attached to one another in a desired and reproducible manner. In particular, the article 10 and the electronic device 12 can be attached to each other in a predetermined position and in an opposite orientation without external intervention and without the use of mechanical fasteners. The article 10 and the electronic device 12 can remain attached to each other until a release force that overcomes the engagement therebetween is applied. However, in some cases, it is desirable to sequentially separate the article 10 from the electronic device 12 (such as a zipper), in which case the object 10 and the electronic device 12 can be unwound. The release force of the inter-engagement is applied to an attachment member each time. For example, an attachment member can include a suitably matched pair of magnetic elements, one in the article 10 and the other in the electronic device 12.
電子裝置12可以有許多形式。例如,電子裝置12可以是一可攜式電子裝置。在某些例子中,該可攜式電子裝置可包括外殼15。外殼15可包覆該可攜式電子裝置的的構件並提供該等構件支撐。外殼15亦可為佔據該可攜式電子裝置的正面絕大部分的大且顯著的顯示器提供支 撐。該顯示器可被用來呈現視覺內容。該視覺內容包括靜態影像、視覺(visual)、文字資料、以及圖形資料其包括被用作為圖形使用者界面(GUI)的一部分的圖像(icons)。 The electronic device 12 can take many forms. For example, the electronic device 12 can be a portable electronic device. In some examples, the portable electronic device can include a housing 15. The outer casing 15 can enclose the components of the portable electronic device and provide support for the components. The housing 15 can also provide a large and significant display that occupies most of the front of the portable electronic device. support. The display can be used to present visual content. The visual content includes still images, visuals, textual materials, and graphical materials that include images that are used as part of a graphical user interface (GUI).
在某些情形中,該顯示器的至少一部分可以是觸碰敏感的(touch sensitive)。觸碰敏感係指在一觸碰事件中,一物件(如,手指、觸寫筆等等)可與該顯示器的上表面接觸或緊鄰。該觸碰事件的詳細情況(位置、壓力、持續時間等等)可被用來提供資訊給該可攜式電子裝置以進行處理。在一些實施例中,資訊除了被提供給該可攜式電子裝置之外,資訊可藉由使用例如密著性致動器(haptic actuator)以觸覺的方式被該可攜式電子裝置提供。應被理解的是,此組態是舉例的方式而不是限制的方式,因為該電子裝置可以廣泛地變化。在一例子中,該可攜式電子裝置是平板電腦,譬如像是由設在美國加州Cupertino的Apple公司製造的iPadTM。 In some cases, at least a portion of the display can be touch sensitive. Touch sensitive means that an object (eg, a finger, a stylus, etc.) can be in contact with or in close proximity to the upper surface of the display during a touch event. The details of the touch event (location, pressure, duration, etc.) can be used to provide information to the portable electronic device for processing. In some embodiments, in addition to being provided to the portable electronic device, information can be provided in a tactile manner by the portable electronic device using, for example, a haptic actuator. It should be understood that this configuration is by way of example and not limitation, as the electronic device can vary widely. In one example, the portable electronic apparatus is a tablet computer, for example, such as iPad TM in California, manufactured by Apple Inc. of Cupertino.
物件10可以廣泛地變化且可以有許多形式,譬如像是該電子裝置12的附件或配備。作為一附件,該物件10可被建構成一外蓋、一支架、一底座(dock)、一懸掛件、一輸入/輸出裝置等等。在一特別有用的形式中,該物件10可以是一保護蓋的形式,其可包括一被設置在該可攜式電子裝置的顯示器上的構件,譬如一摺片(flap)。與該電子裝置12一樣地,該物件10亦可包括外殼17其可包覆該物件10的構件並提供該等物件支撐。 The article 10 can vary widely and can take many forms, such as an attachment or equipment such as the electronic device 12. As an accessory, the article 10 can be constructed as an outer cover, a bracket, a dock, a suspension, an input/output device, and the like. In a particularly useful form, the article 10 can be in the form of a protective cover that can include a member, such as a flap, disposed on the display of the portable electronic device. As with the electronic device 12, the article 10 can also include a housing 17 that can enclose the member of the article 10 and provide support for the articles.
該物件10或電子裝置12的一者或兩者可包括附著特徵構造(attachment feature)。例如,物件10可包括附著系統13且該電子裝置12可包括對應的附著系統14。附著系統13可與該對應的附著系統14合作,用以以一種可釋開的方式來附著該物件10與該電子裝置12。當該物件10與該電子裝置12彼此附著時,它們可如單一操作單元般地操作。另一方面,在分離模式中,物件10與電子裝置12可分開動作,且如 果有需要時可如兩個獨立的部件般地動作。附著系統13及14係以該物件10與該電子裝置12可以所想要的且可重覆的方式彼此附著的方式被建構。換言之,附著系統13及14可重複地將該物件10與該電子裝置12對準在一起,致使它們在一相對於彼此的預定位置上是一致的。 One or both of the article 10 or the electronic device 12 can include an attachment feature. For example, article 10 can include attachment system 13 and the electronic device 12 can include a corresponding attachment system 14. Attachment system 13 can cooperate with the corresponding attachment system 14 to attach the article 10 to the electronic device 12 in a releasable manner. When the article 10 and the electronic device 12 are attached to each other, they can operate as a single operating unit. On the other hand, in the split mode, the object 10 and the electronic device 12 can be operated separately, and It can behave like two separate parts if needed. The attachment systems 13 and 14 are constructed in such a manner that the article 10 and the electronic device 12 can be attached to each other in a desired and repeatable manner. In other words, the attachment systems 13 and 14 can repeatedly align the article 10 with the electronic device 12 such that they are consistent at a predetermined location relative to each other.
該等附著特徵構造可廣泛地變化。該附著可由各式的耦接來提供,其包括機械的、電子的、靜電的、磁性的、摩擦的、及/或類此者的形式。在一實施例中,該附著不能從該物件及/或電子裝置的外部被看到。例如,該物件與該電子裝置不能包括對於外觀及質感或美感外觀有不利影響之外部可看到的附著特徵構造(如,按扣、銷栓等等),但可包括不會從該物件或電子裝置的外部被看到且不會對該物件或電子裝置的外觀及質感或美感外觀有不利影響的附著特徵構造。舉例而言,該等附著特徵構造可由不會破壞該物件或電子裝置的外表面的吸力表面來提供。在一實施例中,該等附著特徵構造的至少一部分利用磁性吸力來提供該吸力的一部分或全部。 These attachment feature configurations can vary widely. The attachment may be provided by a variety of couplings including mechanical, electrical, electrostatic, magnetic, frictional, and/or the like. In an embodiment, the attachment cannot be seen from the exterior of the article and/or electronic device. For example, the article and the electronic device may not include externally visible attachment features (eg, snaps, pins, etc.) that adversely affect the appearance and texture or aesthetic appearance, but may include not from the object or An attachment feature that is visible to the exterior of the electronic device and that does not adversely affect the appearance and texture or aesthetic appearance of the article or electronic device. For example, the attachment feature configurations can be provided by a suction surface that does not damage the outer surface of the article or electronic device. In an embodiment, at least a portion of the attachment feature configurations utilize magnetic attraction to provide a portion or all of the suction.
該等附著系統可包括一或多個附著特徵構造。如果使用多個特徵構造的話,它們的固定方式可以是相同的亦或可以是不同的。例如,在一實施方式中,一第一附著特徵構造利用一第一附著機構,而一第二附著特徵構造則利用一不同於該第一附著機構的第二附著機構。例如,該第一附著機構可利用摩擦耦合,而該第二附著機構則可利用磁力。在另一種實施方式中,一第一附著特徵構造利用一第一附著機構,而一第二附著特徵構造則利用相同或類似的附著機構。例如,該第一及第二附著機構可由磁鐵來提供。雖然,該附著機構可以是類似的機構,但應被瞭解的是,該等特徵構造的組態(configuration)可以根據該系統的需要而不同。又,任何數量及組態的附著機構都可被使用。 The attachment systems can include one or more attachment features. If multiple features are used, they may be fixed in the same way or may be different. For example, in one embodiment, a first attachment feature configuration utilizes a first attachment mechanism and a second attachment feature configuration utilizes a second attachment mechanism that is different from the first attachment mechanism. For example, the first attachment mechanism can utilize frictional coupling and the second attachment mechanism can utilize magnetic force. In another embodiment, a first attachment feature configuration utilizes a first attachment mechanism and a second attachment feature configuration utilizes the same or similar attachment mechanism. For example, the first and second attachment mechanisms can be provided by a magnet. Although the attachment mechanism can be a similar mechanism, it should be understood that the configuration of the feature configurations can vary depending on the needs of the system. Also, any number and configuration of attachment mechanisms can be used.
在所示的實施例中,該等附著系統13及14的每一者都包括至少一 第一組對應的附著特徵構造13a/14a及一第二組對應的附著特徵構造13b/14b。附著特徵構造13a可與對應的附著特徵構造14a合作,用以用一可釋開的方式來附著該物件10與該電子裝置12。在一特定的實施方式中,這是藉由磁吸力來達成。又,附著特徵構造13b可與對應的附著特徵構造14b合作,用以用一可釋開的方式來進一步附著該物件10與該電子裝置12。在一特定實施中,這是用磁性吸力來達成。舉例而言,附著特徵構造13a/14a可被設置在第一位置,而附著特徵構造13b/14b可被設在第二位置。 In the illustrated embodiment, each of the attachment systems 13 and 14 includes at least one The first set of corresponding attachment features 13a/14a and a second set of corresponding attachment features 13b/14b. The attachment feature 13a can cooperate with a corresponding attachment feature 14a for attaching the article 10 to the electronic device 12 in a releasable manner. In a particular embodiment, this is achieved by magnetic attraction. Again, the attachment feature 13b can cooperate with a corresponding attachment feature 14b for further attaching the article 10 to the electronic device 12 in a releasable manner. In a particular implementation, this is achieved with magnetic attraction. For example, the attachment features 13a/14a can be disposed in a first position and the attachment features 13b/14b can be disposed in a second position.
在一特定的例子中,與附著特徵構造13a合作的該附著特徵構造14a將該電子裝置12固定至物件10。在另一例子中,附著特徵構造13b藉著使用附著特徵構造14b可將物件10固定至電子裝置12。應指出的是,此例子的附著系統13及14可以是分開的或它們可一起合作以產生該附著。如果它們合作的話,附著特徵構造14a及14b對應到一或多個附著特徵構造13a及13b或與附著特徵構造13a及13b匹配。在任何一種情形中,該等附著特徵構造在這些例子的任何一者中可藉由機械的、靜電的、吸附的(suction)、磁性的附著及/或類此者來達成。 In a particular example, the attachment feature formation 14a in cooperation with the attachment feature formation 13a secures the electronic device 12 to the article 10. In another example, the attachment feature 13b can secure the article 10 to the electronic device 12 by using the attachment feature formation 14b. It should be noted that the attachment systems 13 and 14 of this example may be separate or they may cooperate together to create the attachment. If they cooperate, the attachment features 14a and 14b correspond to or match the one or more attachment features 13a and 13b. In either case, such attachment feature configurations can be achieved by any of these examples by mechanical, electrostatic, suction, magnetic attachment, and/or the like.
該等附著系統及附著系統內的該等附著特徵構造的放置可廣泛地變化。關於電子裝置12,附著系統14可被放置在前面、後面、頂部、底部、及/或側邊。附著特徵構造14a及14b可被放置在該附著系統14內的任何位置。因此,附著特徵構造14a及14b可被放置在相對於該外殼及/或該顯示器的任何地方。在一例子中,附著特徵構造14a及14b可沿著該外殼的側面的一或多個者(如,頂側、底側、左側、右側)提供嚙合。在另一例子中,附著特徵構造14a及14b可在該電子裝置12的背面提供嚙合。在又另一個例子中,附著特徵構造14a及14b可在電子裝置12的正面(如,顯示器所在之處,如果有顯示器的話)提供嚙合。在一些情形中,該等附著特徵構造的組合可位在電子裝置12的不同區 域,例如,在側邊及正面。在一實施例中,包括附著特徵構造14a及14b的附著系統14並不會破壞電子裝置12的表面。相類似地,附著系統13,特別是附著特徵構造13a及13b,不會破壞物件10的表面。 The placement of such attachment features within the attachment system and attachment system can vary widely. With regard to the electronic device 12, the attachment system 14 can be placed on the front, back, top, bottom, and/or sides. Attachment features 14a and 14b can be placed anywhere within the attachment system 14. Thus, the attachment features 14a and 14b can be placed anywhere relative to the housing and/or the display. In an example, the attachment features 14a and 14b can provide engagement along one or more of the sides of the housing (eg, top side, bottom side, left side, right side). In another example, the attachment features 14a and 14b can provide engagement on the back of the electronic device 12. In yet another example, the attachment features 14a and 14b can provide engagement on the front side of the electronic device 12 (e.g., where the display is located, if there is a display). In some cases, the combination of the attachment features can be located in different regions of the electronic device 12. Domains, for example, on the sides and on the front. In an embodiment, the attachment system 14 including the attachment features 14a and 14b does not damage the surface of the electronic device 12. Similarly, the attachment system 13, particularly the attachment features 13a and 13b, does not destroy the surface of the article 10.
根據一實施例,該等附著特徵構造可包括磁性元件。該等磁性元件可被建構來協助將該物件10相對於電子裝置12定位成一匹配的配置。該等磁性元件可進一步協助將該物件10及該電子裝置12固定成一匹配的嚙合。應指出的是,物件10與電子裝置12的嚙合可藉由施加一可讓物件10與電子裝置12分開回到個別物件狀態之適當的釋開力量而被逆轉。然而,該等磁性元件可在無需任何類型的緊固件,機械的或其它類型的緊固件之下允許物件10與電子裝置12隨後重新回復該匹配嚙合。以此方式,該等磁性元件在該物件10與該電子裝置12之間提供一種可重複的且一致的嚙合。 According to an embodiment, the attachment feature configurations may comprise magnetic elements. The magnetic elements can be constructed to assist in positioning the article 10 relative to the electronic device 12 in a matched configuration. The magnetic elements can further assist in securing the article 10 and the electronic device 12 to a mating engagement. It should be noted that the engagement of the article 10 with the electronic device 12 can be reversed by applying an appropriate release force that allows the article 10 to be separated from the electronic device 12 back to the individual article state. However, the magnetic elements can allow the article 10 and the electronic device 12 to subsequently regain the mating engagement without the need for any type of fastener, mechanical or other type of fastener. In this manner, the magnetic elements provide a repeatable and consistent engagement between the article 10 and the electronic device 12.
該物件10與該電子裝置12可進一步分別包括構件16及18。構件16及18典型地與該物件10與該電子裝置12相關,且例如可以是被用來提供支撐的機械的或結構式構件,或它們可以是可提供特定的操作/功能組的操作性/功能性構件。該等構件可專屬於它們各自的裝置或它們可被建構來用於與對應的物件或裝置的態樣(aspects)耦合(如,有線的或無線的耦合)。結構性構件的例子可包括框架、壁、緊固件、加強件、運動機構(鉸鏈)等等。操作性構件的例子包括處理性、記憶體、電池組、天線、電路、感測器、顯示器、輸入等等。根據所想要的組態,該等構件可以是外部的(如,露在表面上)及/或內部的(如,嵌埋在外殼內)。 The article 10 and the electronic device 12 can further include members 16 and 18, respectively. Components 16 and 18 are typically associated with the article 10 with the electronic device 12 and may be, for example, mechanical or structural members used to provide support, or they may be operative to provide a particular set of operations/functions/ Functional components. The components may be exclusive to their respective devices or they may be constructed for coupling (e.g., wired or wireless coupling) to the aspects of the corresponding article or device. Examples of structural members may include frames, walls, fasteners, reinforcements, kinematics (hinge), and the like. Examples of operational components include handling, memory, battery packs, antennas, circuits, sensors, displays, inputs, and the like. Depending on the desired configuration, the components may be external (eg, exposed on the surface) and/or internal (eg, embedded within the housing).
圖2A及2B為依據一被描述的實施例的物件20的簡化立體圖,該物件可經由一磁性附著系統而被可釋開地附著至電子裝置22。物件20與電子裝置22大致對應於參考圖1所描述的物件及電子裝置。在一實施例中,該磁性附著系統可被體現為磁性表面24(以點線及陰影來表 示),更明確地被體現為在電子裝置22的側邊的磁性表面24。磁性表面24可在被放置成與物件20內的一對應的附著特徵構造彼此緊鄰時提供一可與該對應的附著特徵構造合作的磁場。該磁場可建立一淨磁吸力,其可將該物件20與該電子裝置22拉在一起成為如圖2B所示之沿著嚙合表面26的匹配嚙合。 2A and 2B are simplified perspective views of an article 20 in accordance with a described embodiment, the article being releasably attached to the electronic device 22 via a magnetic attachment system. The object 20 and the electronic device 22 generally correspond to the object and the electronic device described with reference to FIG. In an embodiment, the magnetic attachment system can be embodied as a magnetic surface 24 (indicated by dotted lines and shadows) Shown, more specifically embodied as a magnetic surface 24 on the side of the electronic device 22. The magnetic surface 24 can provide a magnetic field that can cooperate with the corresponding attachment feature configuration when placed in close proximity to a corresponding attachment feature configuration within the article 20. The magnetic field establishes a net magnetic attraction that pulls the article 20 with the electronic device 22 into a mating engagement along the engagement surface 26 as shown in Figure 2B.
換言之,該磁性表面24所提供的該磁場可具有可讓該物件20與該電子裝置22之間的淨磁吸力實質垂直該嚙合表面26的特性。又,該磁場可讓該物件20與該電子裝置22之間的淨磁吸力被均勻地施加於該嚙合表面26上。為了要釋開該物件20與該電子裝置22,一釋開力量可被施加至這兩個結合在一起的物件上,用以克服該磁性附著系統所提供之淨磁吸力。 In other words, the magnetic field provided by the magnetic surface 24 can have characteristics that allow the net magnetic attraction between the object 20 and the electronic device 22 to be substantially perpendicular to the engagement surface 26. Moreover, the magnetic field allows the net magnetic attraction between the object 20 and the electronic device 22 to be uniformly applied to the engagement surface 26. In order to release the article 20 and the electronic device 22, a release force can be applied to the two bonded articles to overcome the net magnetic attraction provided by the magnetic attachment system.
應被瞭解的是,雖然只有一側壁被示出,但在一些例子中,不同的側壁及側壁的組合可依據該附著界面的需要被使用。應指出的是,使用磁性附著件排除了對於機械附著件,譬如緊固件,的需要。又,不用機械式附著件及整體磁吸力的均勻性可讓該物件20與該電子裝置22的表面不受破壞,這有助於產生同一個整體(oneness)的外觀,在該同一個整體中該物件20與該電子裝置22看起來像是一個單一的完整個體。外觀上的均一性可改善該物件20與該電子裝置22兩者整體的美學外觀。 It should be understood that although only one side wall is shown, in some examples, different combinations of side walls and side walls may be used depending on the needs of the attachment interface. It should be noted that the use of magnetic attachments eliminates the need for mechanical attachments such as fasteners. Moreover, the uniformity of the mechanical attachment member and the overall magnetic attraction can prevent the surface of the object 20 and the electronic device 22 from being damaged, which contributes to the appearance of the same oneness, in the same whole. The object 20 and the electronic device 22 appear to be a single intact individual. The uniformity in appearance can improve the overall aesthetic appearance of both the article 20 and the electronic device 22.
在一實施例中,一磁性表面可藉由將該附著特徵構造形式的可磁性地吸引的元件嵌埋在該電子元件22及/或該物件20內來產生。亦即,該等可磁性地吸引的元件可被設置在該物件20與該電子裝置22內,例如在該電子裝置22的外殼內。在此組態中,該外殼可用非磁性材料,譬如像是塑膠或非鐵金屬,譬如鋁,來製造。以此方式,磁力線可被建構,用以穿透該外殼的壁。該等附著特徵構造不會破壞該物件20與該電子裝置22的外表面的實體外觀。在該物件20與該電子裝置22中 的該等可磁性地吸引的元件可被配置成可產生能夠彼此合作的磁場以產生可將該物件20與該電子裝置22附著在一起成為匹配嚙合的磁吸力的組態。該磁吸力被建構來產生一與該物件20與該電子裝置22之間的嚙合表面26正交的磁吸力。 In one embodiment, a magnetic surface can be created by embedding the magnetically attractable element in the form of an attachment feature in the electronic component 22 and/or the article 20. That is, the magnetically attractable elements can be disposed within the article 20 and the electronic device 22, such as within the housing of the electronic device 22. In this configuration, the housing can be made of a non-magnetic material such as a plastic or non-ferrous metal such as aluminum. In this way, lines of magnetic force can be constructed to penetrate the wall of the outer casing. The attachment feature configurations do not destroy the physical appearance of the object 20 and the outer surface of the electronic device 22. In the object 20 and the electronic device 22 The magnetically attractable elements can be configured to generate a magnetic field that can cooperate with each other to create a configuration that can attach the article 20 to the electronic device 22 to match the magnetic attraction. The magnetic attraction is configured to produce a magnetic attraction orthogonal to the engagement surface 26 between the article 20 and the electronic device 22.
介於該物件20與該電子裝置22內對應的磁性元件之間的磁吸力亦可沿著該嚙合表面26被均一地施加。沿著該嚙合表面26的整個磁吸力的均一性可以是該物件20與該電子裝置22內對應的磁性元件之間分離距離的均一性的結果。該均一性亦可以是該物件20與該電子裝置22內對應的磁性元件之間磁通量的一致性的結果。該磁性附著的均一性可藉由該物件20與該電子裝置22的表面(其每一者都形成一彼此適配的井)來予以促進。例如,一表面可以是平的或具有內凹的形狀,而另一表面可具有一相匹配的外凸形狀。以此方式,藉由緊密地配適在一起,在該物件20與該電子裝置22內的每一對應的磁性元件之間的分離距離可被減小至最小。表面形狀的一致性亦可藉由減小或消除在嚙合表面26處的接縫的外觀來強化該物件20與該電子裝置22的整體外觀與質感。當該物件20與該電子裝置22彼此附著在一起時,此無縫的品質可提供一單一個體的錯覺。 The magnetic attraction between the object 20 and the corresponding magnetic element within the electronic device 22 can also be applied uniformly along the engagement surface 26. The uniformity of the overall magnetic attraction along the engagement surface 26 may be a result of the uniformity of the separation distance between the object 20 and the corresponding magnetic element within the electronic device 22. The uniformity may also be a result of the consistency of the magnetic flux between the object 20 and the corresponding magnetic element within the electronic device 22. The uniformity of the magnetic attachment can be facilitated by the object 20 and the surface of the electronic device 22, each of which forms a well that fits each other. For example, one surface may be flat or have a concave shape while the other surface may have a matching convex shape. In this manner, by closely fitting together, the separation distance between the article 20 and each corresponding magnetic element within the electronic device 22 can be minimized. The uniformity of the surface shape can also enhance the overall appearance and texture of the article 20 and the electronic device 22 by reducing or eliminating the appearance of the seam at the engagement surface 26. This seamless quality provides the illusion of a single individual when the object 20 and the electronic device 22 are attached to each other.
除了強化整體外觀與質感之外,介於磁性元件之間分離距離的一致性可讓該物件20與該電子裝置22之間的附著力均勻地沿著該嚙合表面26。以此方式,該嚙合力量可被均勻地分布於嚙合表面26上以防止會對該物件20與該電子裝置22間的嚙合的整體完整性產生不利影響的皺曲(buckling)、脆弱點等等產生。 In addition to enhancing the overall appearance and texture, the uniformity of the separation distance between the magnetic elements allows the adhesion between the article 20 and the electronic device 22 to be evenly along the engagement surface 26. In this manner, the meshing force can be evenly distributed over the engagement surface 26 to prevent buckling, fragility, etc. that can adversely affect the overall integrity of the engagement between the article 20 and the electronic device 22. produce.
圖3A及3B是一藉由磁性附著系統34與對應的附著系統36而被可釋開地附著至一電子裝置32的物件30的簡化立體圖。應指出的是,此特定的實施例與示於圖2A,2B中的實施例類似,但不同處在於,之前設置在側壁的磁性表面現在被設置在電子裝置32的一個面上及非必 要地在該物件30的一對立面上。例如,在一包括顯示裝置的電子裝置的例子中,該磁性附著系統34的磁性元件可被嵌埋在該顯示器表面後方。 3A and 3B are simplified perspective views of an article 30 releasably attached to an electronic device 32 by a magnetic attachment system 34 and a corresponding attachment system 36. It should be noted that this particular embodiment is similar to the embodiment shown in Figures 2A, 2B, but differs in that the magnetic surface previously disposed on the sidewall is now disposed on one side of the electronic device 32 and is not necessarily It is intended to be on a pair of façades of the article 30. For example, in an example of an electronic device that includes a display device, the magnetic components of the magnetic attachment system 34 can be embedded behind the display surface.
圖3B顯示彼此磁性地附著以形成合作系統38的該物件30與該電子裝置32。作為該合作系統38的一部分,該電子裝置32及物件30可彼此合作以提供該物件30或該電子裝置32分別無法提供的特徵構造。例如,物件30可以是一外蓋的形式,其可提供防護的特徵構造。在一實施例中,保護蓋可在該電子裝置被運送或儲存的期間被用來支撐並保護該子裝置32(如,覆蓋該顯示器表面)。因為該等磁性附著系統34及36之間的磁性附著的可釋開的本質的關係,所以物件30可在要使用該電子裝置32的時候被輕易地取下及後續在需要的時候被重新附著。 FIG. 3B shows the article 30 and the electronic device 32 magnetically attached to each other to form the cooperative system 38. As part of the cooperative system 38, the electronic device 32 and the article 30 can cooperate with one another to provide features that the article 30 or the electronic device 32 cannot provide, respectively. For example, article 30 can be in the form of an outer cover that provides a protective feature. In an embodiment, the protective cover can be used to support and protect the sub-device 32 (eg, to cover the display surface) during transport or storage of the electronic device. Because of the releasable nature of the magnetic attachment between the magnetic attachment systems 34 and 36, the article 30 can be easily removed when the electronic device 32 is to be used and subsequently reattached when needed. .
該等磁性元件的設置可以是,只有該電子裝置32內的某些磁性敏感元件會受到該等被嵌埋的磁性元件所產生的磁場影響。例如,一霍耳效應感測器可被用來藉由使用位在該物件30內的磁性元件產生的磁場來偵測該物件30是否被磁性地附著至該電子裝置32並覆蓋顯示器的所有部分或一部分。在另一方面,在該電子裝置32內的一磁性敏感元件(譬如,一依賴外部磁場(如,地球提供的磁場)的羅盤)必不能受到該等被嵌埋的磁性元件產生的磁場線不當的影響。因此,該等磁性元件可限制在該電子裝置32內遠離該等磁性敏感元件(如,羅盤)的位置處。 The magnetic elements may be arranged such that only certain magnetic sensitive elements within the electronic device 32 are affected by the magnetic fields generated by the embedded magnetic elements. For example, a Hall effect sensor can be used to detect whether the object 30 is magnetically attached to the electronic device 32 and covers all portions of the display by using a magnetic field generated by a magnetic element located within the object 30. Or part of it. In another aspect, a magnetic sensitive component within the electronic device 32 (e.g., a compass that relies on an external magnetic field (e.g., a magnetic field provided by the earth) must not be subjected to improper magnetic field lines generated by the embedded magnetic components. Impact. Thus, the magnetic elements can be confined within the electronic device 32 away from the locations of the magnetic sensitive components (eg, compasses).
圖4A及4C是一藉由磁性系統44被可釋開地附著至一電子裝置42的物件40的簡化立體圖。此實施例與圖2A,2B及圖3A,3B類似之處在於,該磁性系統44可包括多個可磁性地吸引的元件及在於該物件40與該電子裝置42大體上對應於先前各圖式中提到的物件及電子裝置。例如,一組可磁性地吸引的磁性元件44a可相對於該物件40與該電子裝置42的一側予以設置,而一第二組可磁性地吸引的磁性元件44b可 相對於該物件40與該電子裝置42的一面予以設置。如圖4B所示,合作系統46可藉由將該物件40與該電子裝置42設置成彼此緊鄰來形成,致使除了位在電子裝置42與物件40的面上的磁性元件44b之外,位在該物件40與該電子裝置42的側邊上的磁性元件44a亦彼此磁性地相吸。在側邊及面上所產生的整體磁吸力足以將該物件40與該電子裝置42保持在匹配嚙合以形成該合作系統46。 4A and 4C are simplified perspective views of an article 40 releasably attached to an electronic device 42 by a magnetic system 44. This embodiment is similar to FIGS. 2A, 2B and FIGS. 3A, 3B in that the magnetic system 44 can include a plurality of magnetically attractable elements and in that the object 40 and the electronic device 42 generally correspond to previous figures. The objects and electronic devices mentioned in the article. For example, a set of magnetically attractable magnetic elements 44a can be disposed relative to the object 40 and one side of the electronic device 42, and a second set of magnetically attractable magnetic elements 44b can be One side of the electronic device 42 is disposed relative to the object 40. As shown in FIG. 4B, the cooperation system 46 can be formed by placing the object 40 and the electronic device 42 in close proximity to each other, so that in addition to the magnetic element 44b located on the face of the electronic device 42 and the object 40, The object 40 and the magnetic elements 44a on the sides of the electronic device 42 also magnetically attract each other. The overall magnetic attraction generated on the sides and faces is sufficient to maintain the mating engagement of the article 40 with the electronic device 42 to form the cooperating system 46.
在一實施例中,如圖4C所示,該合作系統46係以打開的組態被顯示,其中物件40被用作為該電子裝置42的一可打開及閉合的外蓋。亦即,物件40係如該電子裝置42的保護蓋般地作用。在此實施例中,物件40可包括黏結件48其沿著該電子裝置42的側邊附著及摺片50其附著至該電子裝置42的正面且更明確地附著至頂面52。頂面52可對應於一顯示器。在一實施方式中,摺片50可相對於該黏結件48運動。該運動可廣泛地變化。在一例子中,摺片50可相對於該黏結件48樞轉。該樞轉可廣泛地變化。在一例子中,該樞轉可藉由一鉸鏈機構來實施。在另一例子中,該樞轉可藉由一摺疊來實施。再者,該摺片可以是堅硬的、半堅硬的或可撓曲的。以此方式,物件40可形成一打開的組態,即該摺片50被放置在遠離該電子裝置42(顯示器52可被看到),與一閉合的組態,即摺片50被放置成與該電子裝置42相鄰(顯示器52被覆蓋,就如圖4B所示的閉合狀態)。 In one embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4C, the cooperative system 46 is shown in an open configuration in which the article 40 is used as an openable and closable cover for the electronic device 42. That is, the object 40 functions like a protective cover of the electronic device 42. In this embodiment, the article 40 can include a bonding member 48 that is attached along the sides of the electronic device 42 and that is attached to the front side of the electronic device 42 and more clearly attached to the top surface 52. Top surface 52 can correspond to a display. In an embodiment, the flap 50 is movable relative to the bond 48. This movement can vary widely. In one example, the flap 50 is pivotable relative to the bond 48. This pivoting can vary widely. In an example, the pivoting can be implemented by a hinge mechanism. In another example, the pivoting can be implemented by a fold. Again, the flaps can be rigid, semi-rigid or flexible. In this manner, the article 40 can be formed in an open configuration in which the flap 50 is placed away from the electronic device 42 (the display 52 can be seen), and with a closed configuration, that is, the flap 50 is placed Adjacent to the electronic device 42 (the display 52 is covered, as shown in the closed state of Figure 4B).
在一實施例中,黏結件48只位在一側上,而摺片50只位在頂面52。在此組態中,該電子裝置42的其它表面都被外露。因此,在該物件被附著於該電子裝置上的同時,該電子裝置之美可被展現出來。又,此組態可提供更佳的I/O存取及與功能有關的連接性(如,按扭、連接器等等)。 In one embodiment, the adhesive member 48 is only on one side and the flap 50 is only on the top surface 52. In this configuration, the other surfaces of the electronic device 42 are exposed. Therefore, the beauty of the electronic device can be exhibited while the object is attached to the electronic device. Again, this configuration provides better I/O access and feature-related connectivity (eg, buttons, connectors, etc.).
雖然該等磁性元件的目的是類似的,即,將物件附著至電子裝置,但應被理解的是,這些機構可廣泛地變化。在一些例子中,磁場可 被不同地建構。舉例而言,該側邊安裝式的磁性表面可提供一第一磁力及該面向正面的磁性表面可提供一不同於該第一磁力的第二磁力。這一部分是因為不同的固持要求以及不同的表面積,即可用空間,其對於該電子裝置的內部構件的影響。在一例子中,該側邊安裝式的磁性表面提供一較大的固持力量來將該物件固定至該電子裝置,即其為主要的固定力量,而該面向正面的磁性表面則提供輔助的固定力量。 While the purpose of the magnetic elements is similar, i.e., attaching the items to the electronic device, it should be understood that these mechanisms can vary widely. In some cases, the magnetic field can It was constructed differently. For example, the side-mounted magnetic surface can provide a first magnetic force and the front-facing magnetic surface can provide a second magnetic force different from the first magnetic force. This is due in part to the different retention requirements and the different surface area available, which is the space that affects the internal components of the electronic device. In one example, the side-mounted magnetic surface provides a greater holding force to secure the article to the electronic device, ie, it is the primary fixed force, and the front facing magnetic surface provides an auxiliary fixation power.
在一例子中,該摺片50包括多個區段,這些區段是半堅硬式且可相對於彼此彎折,使得該摺片是可運動的且是可撓曲的。在一實施例中,該摺片50可被摺疊成一或多種不同的組態,且在一些例子中,可使用一類似上文所描述的磁性系統被維持在這些組態。這些及其它實施例將在下文中予以更詳細的描述。又,應被理解的是,該等被描述的實施例,並不侷限於外蓋且其它的組態亦可被使用,其包括被用作為一懸掛設備的配件裝置、用於該電子裝置的支撐機構以改善該顯示裝置的觀看,及用作為該顯示器的觸控部分的輸入觸碰事件的支撐機構,等等。 In one example, the flap 50 includes a plurality of sections that are semi-rigid and that are bendable relative to each other such that the flap is movable and flexible. In an embodiment, the flaps 50 can be folded into one or more different configurations, and in some examples, a magnetic system similar to that described above can be maintained in these configurations. These and other embodiments are described in more detail below. Moreover, it should be understood that the described embodiments are not limited to the outer cover and other configurations may be used, including accessory devices that are used as a suspension device for the electronic device. The support mechanism is for improving the viewing of the display device, and using a support mechanism for an input touch event of the touch portion of the display, and the like.
該電子裝置與該物件可以有許多種形式。對於此討論的其餘部分而言,該電子裝置係以手持的可攜式運算裝置為例加以描述。因此,圖5顯示依據被描述的實施例的電子裝置100的頂視立體圖。該電子裝置100可處理資料,更明確地為媒體資料,譬如像是音訊、視訊、影像等等。舉例而言,該電子裝置100大體上對應於一種可作為智慧手機、音樂播放器、遊戲機、視覺播放器(visual player)、個人數位助理(PDA)、平板電腦及類此者的裝置。電子裝置100亦可以是手持式。關於手持,該電子裝置100可用一手握持同時用另一手操作(即,無需一參考表面,如桌面)。因此,該電子裝置100可被握持於一手之中,同時操作輸入指令可由另一手來提供。該等操作輸入指令可包括操作音量開關、保留開關(hold switch)、或提供輸入至一觸敏感表面,譬 如一觸碰敏感顯示器或一觸碰面板。 The electronic device and the article can take many forms. For the remainder of this discussion, the electronic device is described by way of example of a handheld portable computing device. Accordingly, FIG. 5 shows a top perspective view of an electronic device 100 in accordance with the described embodiments. The electronic device 100 can process data, more specifically media data, such as audio, video, video, and the like. For example, the electronic device 100 generally corresponds to a device that can function as a smart phone, a music player, a gaming machine, a visual player, a personal digital assistant (PDA), a tablet, and the like. The electronic device 100 can also be handheld. With regard to hand-held, the electronic device 100 can be held with one hand while being operated with the other hand (ie, without a reference surface, such as a table top). Thus, the electronic device 100 can be held in one hand while the operational input command can be provided by another hand. The operational input commands may include operating a volume switch, a hold switch, or providing an input to a touch sensitive surface, Such as touching a sensitive display or a touch panel.
該電子裝置100可包括外殼102。在一些實施例中,外殼102可以是一由各種材料,譬如像是塑膠或非磁性金屬,以鍛造、模製或其它方式形成為所想要的形狀的單件式外殼。在該電子裝置100具有一金屬外殼並包含以射頻(RF)為基礎的功能的例子中,該外殼102的一部分可包括能夠讓射頻穿透的材料,譬如像是陶瓷或塑膠。外殼102可被建構來將許多內部構件包圍起來。例如,外殼102可包圍且支撐各式結構及電子構件(包括積體電路晶片)以提供用於該電子裝置100的運算操作。該等積體電路可以是晶片、晶片組、或模組的形式,這些形式的任何一者都可被表面安裝至一印刷電路板、或PCB、或其它支撐結構上。例如,一主要邏輯板(MLB)可具有積體電路安裝其上,其至少可包括一微處理器、半導體記憶體(譬如,FLASH)、及各式支援電路等等。外殼102可包括用來放入內部構件的開口104且在有必要時可被作成能夠容納用來呈現視覺內容的顯示器組件的大小,該顯示器組件被防護層106覆蓋及保護。在一些例子中,該顯示器組件可以是允許觸覺輸入的觸碰敏感的顯示器組件,該觸覺輸入可被用來提供控制訊號至該電子裝置100。在一些例子中,該顯示器組件可以是一大型顯著的顯示區域,其佔據了該電子裝置的正面的大部分面積。 The electronic device 100 can include a housing 102. In some embodiments, the outer casing 102 can be a one-piece outer casing that is forged, molded, or otherwise formed into a desired shape from a variety of materials, such as plastic or non-magnetic metals. In an example where the electronic device 100 has a metal housing and includes radio frequency (RF) based functionality, a portion of the housing 102 can include materials that are capable of RF penetration, such as, for example, ceramic or plastic. The outer casing 102 can be constructed to enclose many internal components. For example, the housing 102 can surround and support various structures and electronic components (including integrated circuit wafers) to provide operational operations for the electronic device 100. The integrated circuits can be in the form of wafers, wafer sets, or modules, any of which can be surface mounted to a printed circuit board, or PCB, or other support structure. For example, a main logic board (MLB) can have an integrated circuit mounted thereon, which can include at least a microprocessor, a semiconductor memory (such as FLASH), various support circuits, and the like. The outer casing 102 can include an opening 104 for insertion into the inner member and can be sized to accommodate a display assembly for presenting visual content if necessary, the display assembly being covered and protected by the protective layer 106. In some examples, the display component can be a touch sensitive display component that allows for tactile input that can be used to provide control signals to the electronic device 100. In some examples, the display assembly can be a large, significant display area that occupies most of the area of the front of the electronic device.
電子裝置100可包括一磁性附著系統,其可被用來將該電子裝置100磁性地附著於至少一被適當地建構的其它物件上。該磁性附著系統可包括多個分布於外殼102內且在一些例子中連接至外殼102的磁性附著特徵構造。例如,該磁性附著系統可包括位在該電子裝置100的不同側的第一磁性附著特徵構造108及第二磁性附著特徵構造110。詳言之,該第一磁性附著特徵構造108可被設置在緊鄰外殼102的側壁102a處。該第二磁性附著特徵構造110可被設置在一靠近該外殼102的側壁102b的開口104內。在電子裝置100包括一顯示器其具有一實質地 填滿該開口104的覆蓋玻璃的實施例中,該第二磁性附著特徵構造110可被設置在該覆蓋玻璃底下。 The electronic device 100 can include a magnetic attachment system that can be used to magnetically attach the electronic device 100 to at least one other item that is properly constructed. The magnetic attachment system can include a plurality of magnetic attachment features that are distributed within the outer casing 102 and, in some examples, to the outer casing 102. For example, the magnetic attachment system can include a first magnetic attachment feature 108 and a second magnetic attachment feature 110 positioned on different sides of the electronic device 100. In particular, the first magnetic attachment feature 108 can be disposed proximate the sidewall 102a of the outer casing 102. The second magnetic attachment feature 110 can be disposed within an opening 104 adjacent the sidewall 102b of the outer casing 102. The electronic device 100 includes a display having a substantial In embodiments in which the cover glass of the opening 104 is filled, the second magnetic attachment feature 110 can be disposed under the cover glass.
將該第一磁性附著特徵構造108設置在該側壁102a可方便將該第一磁性附著特徵構造108用來把該電子裝置100磁性地附著另一被適當地建構的物件,譬如另一電子裝置或一配件裝置。因此,在沒有喪失其一般性之下,該第一磁性附著特徵構造108將在下文中被稱為裝置附著特徵構造108。 Positioning the first magnetic attachment feature 108 on the sidewall 102a facilitates the use of the first magnetic attachment feature 108 to magnetically attach the electronic device 100 to another suitably constructed article, such as another electronic device or An accessory device. Thus, the first magnetic attachment feature 108 will be referred to hereinafter as the device attachment feature 108 without losing its generality.
在另一方面,設置該第二磁性附著特徵構造110可方便用該第二磁性附著特徵構造110來固定另一裝置的態樣(aspects),該另一裝置係藉由該裝置附著特徵構造108而被附著至該電子裝置100。以此方式,該另一裝置與該電子裝置100之間的整體附著可以比只透過該第一附著特徵構造108的附著更加穩固。因此,在沒有喪失其一般性之下,該第二磁性附著特徵構造110將在下文中被稱為固定附著特徵構造110。 In another aspect, providing the second magnetic attachment feature 110 can facilitate the use of the second magnetic attachment feature 110 to secure an aspect of another device by which the device is attached to the feature 108. It is attached to the electronic device 100. In this manner, the overall attachment between the other device and the electronic device 100 can be more robust than the attachment only through the first attachment feature formation 108. Thus, the second magnetic attachment feature 110 will be referred to hereinafter as the fixed attachment feature 110 without losing its generality.
雖然沒有被明確地顯示,但應被理解的是,該磁性附著系統的多個磁性附著特徵構造可被設置在該外殼102的任何適當的位置。例如,該等磁性附著特徵構造可被設置在外殼102的內部的底面或沿著外殼102的側邊102c及120d設置。 Although not explicitly shown, it should be understood that a plurality of magnetic attachment features of the magnetic attachment system can be disposed at any suitable location of the housing 102. For example, the magnetic attachment features can be disposed on the bottom surface of the interior of the outer casing 102 or along the sides 102c and 120d of the outer casing 102.
如圖6所示,該裝置附著特徵構造108與該固定附著特徵構造110每一者都包括一或多個磁性元件。在一例子中,該裝置附著特徵構造108可以是多個可以彼此磁性地相互作用以提供磁場112的磁性元件(只有一部分被示出)。換言之,該磁場112的特性(形狀、場強度等等)係根據每一磁性元件所產生的磁場的相互作用而定。以此方式,磁場112的特性可以很簡單地藉由安排每一磁性元件的特性(如,實體佈局、相對大下、及構成磁極)來予以改變。例如,每一磁性元件可具有不同大下且可沿著一軸線予以設置。以此方式,該等磁性元件每一磁 性元件的磁特性可共同作用,用以建立磁場112的整體特性。 As shown in FIG. 6, the device attachment feature 108 and the fixed attachment feature 110 each include one or more magnetic elements. In an example, the device attachment feature 108 can be a plurality of magnetic elements (only a portion of which are shown) that can magnetically interact with one another to provide a magnetic field 112. In other words, the characteristics (shape, field strength, etc.) of the magnetic field 112 are determined by the interaction of the magnetic field generated by each magnetic element. In this manner, the characteristics of the magnetic field 112 can be varied simply by arranging the characteristics of each magnetic element (e.g., physical layout, relatively large, and constituting magnetic poles). For example, each of the magnetic elements can have a different height and can be disposed along an axis. In this way, the magnetic elements are each magnetic The magnetic properties of the sexual elements can act together to establish the overall characteristics of the magnetic field 112.
在一些例子中,該磁場112被使用於該裝置附著特徵構造108與另一裝置之間的磁性附著上的部分可藉由一分磁器(未示出)來予以強化。該分磁器可用磁活性材料,譬如鋼或鐵,來製造且可被放置在一個會造成原本被引導遠離該附著區的磁場線至少部分地被重新導向該附著區的位置。該等被重新導向的磁場線可具有提高該附著區內的平均磁通量密度的效果。 In some examples, the portion of the magnetic field 112 that is used for magnetic attachment between the device attachment feature 108 and another device can be enhanced by a magnetizer (not shown). The magnetizer can be fabricated from a magnetically active material, such as steel or iron, and can be placed in a position that would cause the magnetic field lines originally directed away from the attachment region to be at least partially redirected to the attachment region. The redirected magnetic field lines can have the effect of increasing the average magnetic flux density within the attachment region.
該裝置附著特徵構造108可在一作用狀態(active state)以及在一不作用的狀態(inactive state)下操作。在該不作用的狀態下,磁通量密度B112可等於或大於在該外殼102的內表面內部的磁通量密度低限值Bthreshold,但在該外殼102的內表面外部則不適用。換言之,在外殼102的外表面處的磁場112的磁通量密度B112小於磁通量密度低限值Bthreshold。該磁通量密度低限值Bthreshold代表一磁通量數值,當低於數值時磁性敏感裝置(譬如,信用卡上的磁條)可保持實質不受影響。此外,一磁性活化材料(譬如,鋼)存在於該電子裝置100外的一區域內本身將不會觸發該裝置附著特徵構造108從該不作用的狀態轉變至該作用狀態。 The device attachment feature 108 can operate in an active state and in an inactive state. In this inactive state, the magnetic flux density B 112 may be equal to or greater than the magnetic flux density lower limit B threshold inside the inner surface of the outer casing 102, but not applicable outside the inner surface of the outer casing 102. In other words, the magnetic flux density B 112 of the magnetic field 112 at the outer surface of the outer casing 102 is less than the magnetic flux density low limit B threshold . The magnetic flux density low limit B threshold represents a magnetic flux value, and when it is lower than the value, the magnetic sensitive device (for example, a magnetic strip on a credit card) can remain substantially unaffected. In addition, the presence of a magnetically activated material (e.g., steel) in an area outside of the electronic device 100 will not itself trigger a transition of the device attachment feature 108 from the inactive state to the active state.
如上文中提到的,當該裝置附著特徵構造108是不作用時,在該外殼102的側邊102a的外表面處的磁場112的磁通量密度B112小於磁通量密度低限值Bthreshold。詳言之,關於該裝置附著特徵構造108,磁通量密度B112可如一離該等磁性元件的距離x的函數般地變化(即,B=B112(x))。因此,當該裝置附著特徵構造112是在不作用狀態時,B112(x)可滿足式(1)。 As mentioned above, when the device attachment feature 108 is inactive, the magnetic flux density B 112 of the magnetic field 112 at the outer surface of the side 102a of the outer casing 102 is less than the magnetic flux density low limit B threshold . In particular, with respect to the device attachment feature 108, the magnetic flux density B 112 can be varied as a function of the distance x from the magnetic elements (i.e., B = B 112 (x)). Thus, when the device attachment feature 112 is in an inactive state, B 112 (x) may satisfy equation (1).
B112(x=x0+t)<Bthreshold, 式(1) B 112 (x=x 0 +t)<B threshold , (1)
其中t是外殼102在側邊102a處的厚度,及x0是從側邊102a的內部到該等磁性元件的距離。當該裝置附著特徵構造108是在不作用的狀 態時,在接近該電子裝置100的外面的區域內的任何磁通量漏損量(即,B112(x>x0+t))係小到足以讓位於該近接區域內的磁性敏感裝置受到不利的影響的能性極低。然而,應指出的是,即使是在不作用的狀態(inactive state),磁場112可具有一滿足式(1)的磁通量數值B112(x=x0+t),且大到足以與被放置成與其極為接近的另一裝置的磁場相互作用。以此方式,即使是式(1)被滿足,在該另一裝置中被適當地建構的磁性附著特徵構造可被用來激活(activate)該裝置附著特徵構造108。 Where t is the thickness of the outer casing 102 at the side 102a, and x 0 is the distance from the interior of the side 102a to the magnetic elements. When the device attachment feature 108 is in an inactive state, any flux leakage amount (ie, B 112 (x>x 0 +t)) in the region near the outside of the electronic device 100 is small enough The ability to adversely affect magnetically sensitive devices located in the proximity region is extremely low. However, it should be noted that even in an inactive state, the magnetic field 112 may have a magnetic flux value B 112 (x = x 0 + t) that satisfies the equation (1) and is large enough to be placed The magnetic field interacts with another device that is in close proximity to it. In this manner, even if equation (1) is satisfied, a magnetically attached feature configuration that is properly constructed in the other device can be used to activate the device attachment feature 108.
磁場112的特性至少包括場強度、磁極、等等。磁場112的特性係根據包括在該裝置附著特徵構造108內的每一磁性元件的磁場的組合。該等被組合的磁場可形成該疊置的磁場112。例如,該等磁性元件可以一種該等個別的磁場的組合產生具有所想要的磁場特性(如,場強度)的磁場112的方式予以配置。例如,該等磁性元件的一種配置的組合可產生具有特性(如,磁性及強度)的磁場112,該等特性大部分係對稱於一特定的軸線(譬如,一幾何中心線)。 The characteristics of the magnetic field 112 include at least field strength, magnetic poles, and the like. The characteristics of the magnetic field 112 are based on a combination of magnetic fields of each of the magnetic elements included in the device attachment feature configuration 108. The combined magnetic fields can form the stacked magnetic field 112. For example, the magnetic elements can be configured in such a manner that a combination of the individual magnetic fields produces a magnetic field 112 having a desired magnetic field characteristic (e.g., field strength). For example, a combination of configurations of the magnetic elements can produce a magnetic field 112 having characteristics (e.g., magnetic and strength) that are mostly symmetrical about a particular axis (e.g., a geometric centerline).
在另一方面,該等磁性元件的配置方式可讓該等磁性元件的磁場的組合所產生的磁場112具有至少一種特性係不對稱於該中心線。例如,在該中心線的一側上的磁性元件被設置成其北磁極係朝向上而在該中心線的另一側上的一對應磁性元件則被設置成其南磁極係朝向上。因此,磁場112的磁特性可以一種適當的方式予以調整以提供所想要的匹配嚙合。例如,磁場112的磁特性可藉由將該等磁性元件以一種可讓磁場112與另一磁場(例如,來自另一磁性附著系統)合作性地相互作用的方式配置來予以改變。兩個磁場間的合作性相互作用可產生讓這兩個物件彼此以一種明確的、精確的、且可重複的方式磁性地附著的結果。 In another aspect, the magnetic elements are arranged in such a manner that the magnetic field 112 produced by the combination of the magnetic fields of the magnetic elements has at least one characteristic that is asymmetric to the centerline. For example, a magnetic element on one side of the centerline is disposed with its north magnetic pole facing upward and a corresponding magnetic element on the other side of the centerline disposed with its south magnetic pole facing upward. Thus, the magnetic properties of the magnetic field 112 can be adjusted in a suitable manner to provide the desired mating engagement. For example, the magnetic properties of the magnetic field 112 can be varied by configuring the magnetic elements in a manner that allows the magnetic field 112 to cooperatively interact with another magnetic field (e.g., from another magnetic attachment system). The cooperative interaction between the two magnetic fields can produce the result of magnetically attaching the two objects to one another in a clear, precise, and repeatable manner.
磁場112的特性可以是穩定的。穩定係指該磁場的特性可實質未變地保持一段持久的時間。因此,一穩定版本的磁場112可藉由使用 磁性特徵在一段持久的時間內係實質上不變(或幾近不變)或至少在一個構件內的任何改變可被另一構件內之相對應的改變所抵銷的磁性元件來產生。該等磁性元件可以一種相對於於其它磁性元件為固定的或至少實質固定的組態來予以實體地配置。例如,該等磁性元件每一者可具有固定的尺寸及相對於彼此以特定的順序設置的磁極用以提供具有所想要的特性(形狀、強度、磁極等等)的磁場112。因此,根據該等磁性元件的特性及本質,磁場112的形狀可在一段持久的期間(譬如,該電子裝置100被預期的操作壽命期間)維持實質上未改變。 The characteristics of the magnetic field 112 can be stable. Stabilization means that the characteristics of the magnetic field can remain substantially unchanged for a sustained period of time. Therefore, a stable version of the magnetic field 112 can be used by The magnetic features are substantially constant (or nearly constant) for a sustained period of time or at least any change in one of the members can be produced by a magnetic element that is offset by a corresponding change in the other member. The magnetic elements may be physically configured in a configuration that is fixed or at least substantially fixed relative to other magnetic elements. For example, the magnetic elements can each have a fixed size and magnetic poles disposed in a particular order relative to one another to provide a magnetic field 112 having desired characteristics (shape, strength, magnetic poles, etc.). Thus, depending on the nature and nature of the magnetic elements, the shape of the magnetic field 112 can remain substantially unchanged for a sustained period of time (e.g., during the expected operational life of the electronic device 100).
然而,在一些實施例中,磁場112的特性可藉由變更該等磁性元件的至少一者的磁特性或其它物力特性來予以改變。當至少一磁性元件具有可被變更的磁特性(如,磁極或場強度)時,所產生的磁場亦可被變更。因此,在一些實施例中,該等磁性元件的至少一者可被特徵化(characterized)為具有動態磁特性。動態(dynamic)係指至少一種磁特性,如磁極,可被變更。以此方式,所得到的磁場的磁場特性亦可改變。該所得到的磁場接著可改變該磁場112的磁特性,其接著可改變該磁性附著系統讓該等物件彼此磁性地附著的方式(如,對準、方位、定心等等)。一電磁鐵是該磁性元件的一個例子,其磁特性可如所需地予以變更。其它的例子包括一注入磁性摻雜物(如,磁鐵礦)之可展延的非磁性基材。以此方式,該可展延的基材可被形成為能夠影響該磁性摻雜材料所產生的磁場的本質的實體形狀。 However, in some embodiments, the characteristics of the magnetic field 112 can be varied by altering the magnetic or other physical properties of at least one of the magnetic elements. When at least one of the magnetic elements has a magnetic property that can be altered (e.g., magnetic pole or field strength), the generated magnetic field can also be altered. Thus, in some embodiments, at least one of the magnetic elements can be characterized as having dynamic magnetic properties. Dynamic means that at least one magnetic property, such as a magnetic pole, can be altered. In this way, the magnetic field characteristics of the resulting magnetic field can also be changed. The resulting magnetic field can then change the magnetic properties of the magnetic field 112, which can then change the manner in which the magnetic attachment system magnetically attaches the items to each other (e.g., alignment, orientation, centering, etc.). An electromagnet is an example of the magnetic element, and its magnetic properties can be changed as desired. Other examples include a stretchable non-magnetic substrate that is implanted with a magnetic dopant (e.g., magnetite). In this manner, the ductile substrate can be formed into a solid shape that is capable of affecting the nature of the magnetic field generated by the magnetic dopant material.
現翻到該磁性附著系統的其它面向,該固定附著特徵構造110可包括一或多個磁性元件116。當多個磁性元件被使用時,該等磁性元件116的配置可廣泛地變化且可與另一裝置上的一對應的特徵構造磁性地相互作用。在一實施例中,與固定附著特徵構造110相關連的該等磁性元件116可協助將另一裝置的至少一部分固定,該另一裝置係藉由裝置附著特徵構造108而被附著至該電子裝置100。 Turning now to other faces of the magnetic attachment system, the fixed attachment feature 110 can include one or more magnetic elements 116. When multiple magnetic elements are used, the configuration of the magnetic elements 116 can vary widely and can magnetically interact with a corresponding feature configuration on another device. In one embodiment, the magnetic elements 116 associated with the fixed attachment feature 110 can assist in securing at least a portion of another device that is attached to the electronic device by the device attachment feature 108. 100.
該等磁性元件116的至少一些部分可具有固定的尺寸及極性(如,一簡單的桿狀磁鐵之類者),而該等磁性元件116的其它部分可具有可改變的磁特性(譬如,電磁鐵),該等磁性元件的另外其它部分可被作成可提供特定的磁特性的形狀。例如,該等磁性元件116的至少一者可被設置在與一包括在另一裝置中磁性回應電路相互作用的位置及(如果有必要的話)被作成與該磁性回應電路相互作用的形狀。因此,該磁性回應電路可對於該固定附著特徵構造110的一特定的磁性元件的存在(或不存在)作出回應。該磁性回應電路的一個例子係關於該霍耳效應感測器118被描述於上文中。 At least some portions of the magnetic elements 116 may have a fixed size and polarity (e.g., a simple rod magnet), while other portions of the magnetic elements 116 may have modifiable magnetic properties (e.g., electromagnetic Iron), other portions of the magnetic elements can be shaped to provide specific magnetic properties. For example, at least one of the magnetic elements 116 can be disposed in a shape that interacts with a magnetic response circuit included in another device and, if necessary, is configured to interact with the magnetic response circuit. Thus, the magnetic response circuit can respond to the presence (or absence) of a particular magnetic component of the fixed attachment feature configuration 110. An example of such a magnetic response circuit is described above with respect to the Hall effect sensor 118.
應指出的是,該等磁性元件116所產生的磁場不應延伸的太遠,致使該電子裝置100內的磁性敏感電路(譬如,霍耳效應感測器118)受到不利的影響。這是特別重要的,因為該磁場通常沒有被包含在該外殼102內,因為該磁場的至少一部分必需延伸於z方向上,用以與其它裝置的磁性作用部分相互作用。因此,在{x,y}內的磁場其延伸程度必需被限制以避開像是霍耳效應感測器118及羅盤120的磁性敏感電路。 It should be noted that the magnetic fields generated by the magnetic elements 116 should not extend too far, causing the magnetic sensitive circuitry (e.g., the Hall effect sensor 118) within the electronic device 100 to be adversely affected. This is particularly important because the magnetic field is typically not contained within the outer casing 102 because at least a portion of the magnetic field must extend in the z-direction to interact with the magnetically active portions of other devices. Therefore, the extent of the magnetic field within {x, y} must be limited to avoid magnetic sensitive circuits such as Hall effect sensor 118 and compass 120.
在特定的實施方式中,該裝置附著特徵構造108的磁性元件可被聚集成不同磁區。以此方式,來自該等磁區的磁場可疊加以形成磁場112。該等磁區可包括不同的磁性元件,其可被配置成由磁性元件126及128所代表的組群。藉由將磁性元件聚集成分開的磁區,該磁性附著系統提供具有所想要的特性的磁場的能力可被實質地提高。磁性元件126及128可彼此相互作用以形成磁場112。在該實施例中,該相互作用可以是磁性元件126與128的每一者的磁特性的組合形式。在某些例子中,磁性元件126及128的配置可以是彼此相關聯,用以提供具有所想要的特性的磁場112。例如,磁性元件126及128係以一種彼此相關的方式予以配置,使得磁場112相關於該裝置附著特徵構造108的水 平中心線是不對稱的(或對稱的)。另一實施例中,磁場112可相關於該裝置附著特徵構造108的垂直中心線是不對稱的(或對稱的)。在又另一實施例中,磁場112可以是水平與垂直都不對稱(或對稱)。 In a particular embodiment, the magnetic elements of the device attachment feature 108 can be gathered into different magnetic regions. In this manner, magnetic fields from the magnetic regions can be superimposed to form a magnetic field 112. The magnetic regions can include different magnetic elements that can be configured as a group represented by magnetic elements 126 and 128. By aggregating the magnetic elements into separate magnetic regions, the ability of the magnetic attachment system to provide a magnetic field having the desired characteristics can be substantially increased. Magnetic elements 126 and 128 can interact with one another to form magnetic field 112. In this embodiment, the interaction can be a combination of the magnetic properties of each of the magnetic elements 126 and 128. In some examples, the configurations of magnetic elements 126 and 128 can be associated with each other to provide a magnetic field 112 having desired characteristics. For example, magnetic elements 126 and 128 are configured in a manner that is related to each other such that magnetic field 112 is associated with water of device attachment feature configuration 108. The flat centerline is asymmetrical (or symmetrical). In another embodiment, the magnetic field 112 may be asymmetric (or symmetrical) with respect to the vertical centerline of the device attachment feature configuration 108. In yet another embodiment, the magnetic field 112 can be asymmetrical (or symmetric) both horizontally and vertically.
圖7A顯示該電子裝置100緊鄰具有磁性附著特徵構造202的物件200。該物件200的磁性附著特徵構造202可包括磁性元件,每一磁性元件產生一個別的磁場,該等磁場可相互作用以聚集地形成一成果磁場(resulting magnetic field)。該成果磁場可具有能夠與該電子裝置100的磁場112相互作用的磁特性(譬如,場強度及形狀),用以將該電子裝置100與該物件200以一種明確的、精確的且可重複的方式在沒有機械式緊固件且無需外部協助下附著在一起。應指出的是,磁場208約為2500高斯(Gauss),而當該裝置附著特徵構造108是在不作用狀態時該磁場112則是約1400高斯。 FIG. 7A shows the electronic device 100 in close proximity to the article 200 having the magnetic attachment feature 202. The magnetic attachment feature 202 of the article 200 can include magnetic elements, each of which produces an additional magnetic field that can interact to collectively form a resulting magnetic field. The resultant magnetic field can have magnetic properties (eg, field strength and shape) that can interact with the magnetic field 112 of the electronic device 100 to provide the electronic device 100 and the object 200 with a clear, precise, and repeatable The way is attached without mechanical fasteners and without external assistance. It should be noted that the magnetic field 208 is about 2500 Gauss, and the magnetic field 112 is about 1400 Gauss when the device attachment feature 108 is in the inactive state.
物件200可以是包括附件、周邊設備、電子裝置、或類此者在內的許多形式。在一實施例中,物件200的形式可以是該電子裝置100之類者。因此,電子裝置100與電子裝置200可使用該裝置附著特徵構造108及磁性附著特徵構造202彼此磁性地附著在一起以形成一合作的電子系統。該合作的電子系統可以是一種電子裝置100內的電子元件與電子裝置200內的對應電子元件彼此合作以實施這兩個電子裝置分開來無法獨立實施的功能的電子系統。在一實施例中,資訊可被傳送於電子裝置100與200之間。 The article 200 can be in many forms including accessories, peripherals, electronic devices, or the like. In an embodiment, the object 200 may be in the form of the electronic device 100 or the like. Accordingly, the electronic device 100 and the electronic device 200 can be magnetically attached to each other using the device attachment feature 108 and the magnetic attachment feature 202 to form a cooperative electronic system. The cooperative electronic system may be an electronic system in which electronic components in the electronic device 100 and corresponding electronic components in the electronic device 200 cooperate with each other to implement functions in which the two electronic devices are separated from each other and cannot be independently implemented. In an embodiment, information can be transmitted between the electronic devices 100 and 200.
詳言之,磁性附著特徵構造202可至少包括磁性元件204及206,它們每一者都可產生磁場能夠彼此相互作用的磁場以提供磁場208(只有一部分被示出)。磁場208的特性係根據該等磁性元件204及206每一者的相互作用。以此方式,磁場208可具有根據磁性元件204及206的每一者的實體佈局、相對尺寸、及構成磁極的磁特性。例如,磁性元件204及206可沿著中心線予以設置且具有可疊置的磁性以提供具有所 想要的特性的磁場208。物件200的磁場208的磁通量密度B208可如一離該等磁性元件204及206的距離的函數般地改變(即,B=B208(x))。 In particular, the magnetic attachment feature 202 can include at least magnetic elements 204 and 206, each of which can generate a magnetic field that the magnetic fields can interact with each other to provide a magnetic field 208 (only a portion is shown). The characteristics of the magnetic field 208 are based on the interaction of each of the magnetic elements 204 and 206. In this manner, the magnetic field 208 can have a physical layout, relative dimensions, and magnetic characteristics that make up the magnetic poles, depending on each of the magnetic elements 204 and 206. For example, magnetic elements 204 and 206 can be disposed along a centerline and have stackable magnetic properties to provide a magnetic field 208 having desired characteristics. The magnetic flux density B 208 of the magnetic field 208 of the object 200 can be varied as a function of the distance from the magnetic elements 204 and 206 (i.e., B = B 208 (x)).
當物件200的形式是一電子裝置時,譬如電子裝置100,則磁通量密度B208滿足式(1)。然而,當物件200的形式是一配件裝置時,則與電子裝置100之滿足式(1)的磁通量密度B112不同地,配件裝置200的磁通量密度B208(x)可滿足式(2)。 When the form of the object 200 is an electronic device, such as the electronic device 100, the magnetic flux density B 208 satisfies the formula (1). However, when the form of the article 200 is an accessory device, the magnetic flux density B 208 (x) of the accessory device 200 can satisfy the formula (2) unlike the magnetic flux density B 112 of the electronic device 100 that satisfies the formula (1).
B208(x=x1+s)>Bthreshold 式(2) B 208 (x=x 1 +s)>B threshold (2)
其中s為外殼212在側邊212a的厚度,及x1為內部分離距離。以此方式,配件裝置200可與電子裝置100磁性地相互作用,比其它方式更進一步地從該電子裝置100被去除。因此,該配件裝置200可被設置在靠近但不必緊鄰該電子裝置100,用以讓該電子裝置100與該物件200能夠以一種明確的、可預測的及可重複的方式彼此磁性地吸附。 Where s is the thickness of the outer casing 212 at the side 212a, and x 1 is the internal separation distance. In this manner, the accessory device 200 can magnetically interact with the electronic device 100 and be removed from the electronic device 100 further than otherwise. Accordingly, the accessory device 200 can be disposed adjacent to, but not necessarily in close proximity to, the electronic device 100 for magnetically adsorbing the electronic device 100 and the article 200 in a clear, predictable, and repeatable manner.
除了磁性附著特徵構造202之外,該配件裝置200可進一步包括磁性附著特徵構造216,其可被用來與固定附著特徵構造110相互作用。磁性附著特徵構造216可包括許多磁性作用構件。一些磁性元件可以是被配置來與在固定附著特徵構造110內相對應的磁性元件合作地相互作用的形式。其它的磁性元件的本質可以是較被動的(passive),因為它們提供一用來與該固定附著特徵構造110內的磁性作用元件完成一磁性電路的機構。該磁性被動元件的一個例子為含鐵磁的磁性材料,譬如像是鐵或鋼,其可與一主動地提供一相關聯的磁場的磁性元件相互作用。以此方式,該含鐵的磁性材料可與該磁場相互作用以完成一磁性電路於該磁性附著特徵構造216內的被動元件與該固定附著特徵構造110內的主動元件之間。 In addition to the magnetic attachment feature 202, the accessory device 200 can further include a magnetic attachment feature 216 that can be used to interact with the fixed attachment feature 110. Magnetic attachment feature 216 can include a number of magnetically active members. Some of the magnetic elements may be in a form configured to cooperatively interact with magnetic elements corresponding within the fixed attachment feature configuration 110. Other magnetic elements may be more passive in nature because they provide a mechanism for completing a magnetic circuit with the magnetically active elements within the fixed attachment feature 110. An example of such a magnetic passive component is a ferromagnetic magnetic material, such as, for example, iron or steel, which can interact with a magnetic element that actively provides an associated magnetic field. In this manner, the iron-containing magnetic material can interact with the magnetic field to complete a magnetic circuit between the passive component within the magnetic attachment feature 216 and the active component within the fixed attachment feature 110.
圖7B顯示該配件裝置200可被用來提供用於電子裝置100的支援功能及服務。藉由容許一部分的磁場208(其具有滿足式(2)的磁通量密度B208)延伸進入該區域214中,介於裝置附著特徵構造108與磁性附著 特徵構造202之間的磁吸力量Fnet可被產生,其中該淨磁吸力量Fnet滿足式(3a)及式(3b)。 FIG. 7B shows that the accessory device 200 can be used to provide support functions and services for the electronic device 100. By allowing a portion of the magnetic field 208 (which has a magnetic flux density B 208 that satisfies equation (2)) to extend into the region 214, the magnetic attraction force F net between the device attachment feature 108 and the magnetic attachment feature 202 can be It is produced in which the net magnetic attraction force F net satisfies the formula (3a) and the formula (3b).
Fnet=(Ltotal)‧B 2/μ0 式(3a) F net = (L total ) ‧ B 2 /μ 0 (3a)
B/B 0=f(xsep) 式(3b) B / B 0 =f(x sep ) (3b)
其中,Ltotal為該等磁性元件的總面積;B為總磁通量密度(B208+B112);xsep為磁性元件之間分開的距離;B0為在該等磁區的表面的磁通量密度。 Where L total is the total area of the magnetic elements; B is the total magnetic flux density (B 208 + B 112 ); x sep is the distance separating the magnetic elements; B 0 is the magnetic flux density at the surface of the magnetic regions .
因磁場208與磁場112的相互作用而產生的淨磁吸力量Fnet的關係,磁性附著特徵構造202可被用來激活裝置附著特徵構造108。又,當該裝置附著特徵構造108被激活時,磁通量密度B112即滿足式(4)。 The magnetic attachment feature 202 can be used to activate the device attachment feature 108 due to the relationship of the net magnetic attraction F net resulting from the interaction of the magnetic field 208 with the magnetic field 112. Again, when the device attachment feature 108 is activated, the magnetic flux density B 112 satisfies equation (4).
B112(x=x0+t)>Bthreshold 式(4)在有作用狀態在磁區214內磁通量密度B112的提高可實質地增強配件裝置200與電子裝置100之間的淨磁吸力量Fnet。又,因為該淨磁吸力量Fnet隨著總磁通量密度B(B208+B112)而改變且磁通量密度B大體上與分開距離成反比地改變(式(3b)),當電子裝置100與配件裝置200彼此接近且分開距離xsep減小至一與電子裝置100及配件裝置200實體接觸相一致的極限值時,該淨磁吸力量Fnet的增加可在一相當短的時間之內快速地提高。淨磁吸力量Fnet的此一快速的增加可造成這兩個裝置迅速地結合在一起,其如圖7C所示,可被稱為“快速嵌至定位”,圖7C顯示電子裝置100沿著嚙合表面218被磁性地吸附至配件裝置200的合作的系統300。應指出的是,在一代表性的實施例中,在該裝置附著特徵構造108內的該等磁性元件可以是N52型磁鐵,而在附著特徵構造216內的該等磁性元件216可以是N35型磁鐵。又,該淨磁吸力是約10牛頓到至少20牛頓,其中需要約3牛頓來激活該裝置附著特徵構造108。 B 112 (x=x 0 +t)>B threshold equation (4) The increase in magnetic flux density B 112 in the magnetic region 214 in an active state can substantially enhance the net magnetic attraction between the accessory device 200 and the electronic device 100. F net . Also, since the net magnetic attraction force F net changes with the total magnetic flux density B (B 208 + B 112 ) and the magnetic flux density B is substantially inversely proportional to the separation distance (formula (3b)), when the electronic device 100 When the accessory devices 200 are close to each other and the separation distance x sep is reduced to a limit value consistent with the physical contact of the electronic device 100 and the accessory device 200, the increase in the net magnetic attraction force F net can be quickly performed in a relatively short period of time. Improve the ground. This rapid increase in the net magnetic attraction force F net can cause the two devices to be quickly joined together, as shown in FIG. 7C, which can be referred to as "quick embedding to positioning", and FIG. 7C shows the electronic device 100 along The engagement surface 218 is magnetically attracted to the cooperating system 300 of the accessory device 200. It should be noted that in a representative embodiment, the magnetic elements within the device attachment feature 108 may be N52 type magnets, and the magnetic elements 216 within the attachment features 216 may be of the N35 type. magnet. Again, the net magnetic attraction is from about 10 Newtons to at least 20 Newtons, wherein about 3 Newtons is required to activate the device attachment feature 108.
介於裝置100與裝置200之間在嚙合表面218的總磁吸力量FNET可用所有被耦合的磁性元件的所有淨磁吸力量Fneti的總和推導出來。換 言之,FNET滿足式(5) The total magnetic attraction force F NET between the device 100 and the device 200 at the engagement surface 218 can be derived from the sum of all the net magnetic forces F neti of all coupled magnetic elements. In other words, F NET satisfies equation (5)
其中是n個構件的每一者的淨磁吸力量Fneti。在一實施例中,淨磁吸力量Fneti與該嚙合表面218被磁場112及磁場208交截(intersect)的部分實質地相正交。 Where is the net magnetic attraction force F neti for each of the n components. In one embodiment, the net magnetic attraction force Fneti is substantially orthogonal to the portion of the engagement surface 218 that is intersected by the magnetic field 112 and the magnetic field 208.
為了要確保沿著裝置100與裝置200之間的嚙合表面的總磁吸力量FNET是均勻的,在附著特徵構造108與202內的每一對應的磁性元件間的分開距離都予以確實地控制。該分開距離可藉由,例如,將該等磁性元件形塑成與該等裝置的形狀相符的形狀來予以確實地控制。例如,如果裝置100具有曲線板(彎曲的)形狀的外殼的話,在裝置100內的磁性元件可被作成與該彎曲的形狀相符的形狀。此外,該等磁性元件可用以種可讓相對應的磁性元件的磁向量彼此對準的方式來形成。以此方式,該淨磁吸力量的大小及方向即可所想要地予以控制。 In order to ensure that the total magnetic attraction force F NET along the mating surface between the device 100 and the device 200 is uniform, the separation distance between each corresponding magnetic element within the attachment features 108 and 202 is reliably controlled. . The separation distance can be reliably controlled by, for example, shaping the magnetic elements into shapes conforming to the shape of the devices. For example, if the device 100 has a curved (curved) shaped outer casing, the magnetic elements within the device 100 can be shaped to conform to the curved shape. Furthermore, the magnetic elements can be formed in such a way that the magnetic vectors of the corresponding magnetic elements are aligned with each other. In this way, the magnitude and direction of the net magnetic force can be controlled as desired.
對準磁向量的一個結果為,每一磁性元件間的淨磁吸力量的方向可被確實地控制。又,藉由將對應的磁性元件之間的分開距離減小至一最小值,每一磁性元件間的淨磁吸力量Fneti可被最大化。此外,保持一實質均勻的分開距離於不同的磁性元件之間,一相對應的均勻磁吸力量可沿著該嚙合表面218被提供。又,藉由適當地調整該等相對應的磁向量,Fnet可被垂直地施加至該嚙合表面。 One consequence of aligning the magnetic vectors is that the direction of the net magnetic force between each magnetic element can be reliably controlled. Moreover, by reducing the separation distance between the corresponding magnetic elements to a minimum value, the net magnetic attraction force F neti between each magnetic element can be maximized. Moreover, maintaining a substantially uniform separation distance between different magnetic elements, a corresponding uniform magnetic force can be provided along the engagement surface 218. Also, F net can be applied perpendicularly to the meshing surface by appropriately adjusting the corresponding magnetic vectors.
除了將相對應的磁性元件間的分開距離最小化之外,相對應的磁性元件間的磁通量密度可藉由使用分磁器(magnetic shunt)來提高。一可用磁活性材料,譬如鋼或鐵,製造的分磁器可被放置在或靠近一磁性元件,其對於將磁通量線引導於所想要的方向上具有影響。以此方式,原本將傳播於一遠離一對應的性元件的方向上的該等磁通量線可被部分地重新引導朝向一所想要的方向,譬如朝向一介於該等裝置之間的一磁性附著區,藉以提高整體磁通量密度。因此,增加磁性元件 間可獲得的磁通量密度可產生淨磁吸力量的實質增強的結果。 In addition to minimizing the separation distance between the corresponding magnetic elements, the magnetic flux density between the corresponding magnetic elements can be increased by using a magnetic shunt. A magnetic separator made of a magnetically active material, such as steel or iron, can be placed at or near a magnetic element that has an effect on directing the magnetic flux lines in the desired direction. In this manner, the magnetic flux lines that would otherwise propagate in a direction away from a corresponding sexual element can be partially redirected toward a desired direction, such as toward a magnetic attachment between the devices. Zone to increase overall magnetic flux density. Therefore, adding magnetic components The resulting magnetic flux density can produce a substantial enhancement of the net magnetic attraction force.
圖8A顯示附著特徵構造110的一實施例。詳言之,附著特徵構造110可以是外殼102的一部分。詳言之,該附著特徵構造可包括可被安裝在該外殼102的突出部404的磁性元件402。磁性元件402可廣泛地變化。例如,磁性元件402可被配置成在該突出部404上的陣列,用來將一配件裝置的至少一部分附著電子裝置100的一特定面向(aspect)。例如,當該配件裝置是一摺片的形式時,該等磁性元件402可被用來將該摺片磁性地附著至該電子裝置100以覆蓋顯示器的至少一部分。該陣列的大小及形狀亦可廣泛地改變。在圖8A所示的實施例中,該陣列可以是矩形的且被作成包含該突出部404的實質部分的大小。 FIG. 8A shows an embodiment of an attachment feature configuration 110. In particular, the attachment feature 110 can be part of the outer casing 102. In particular, the attachment feature formation can include a magnetic element 402 that can be mounted to the projection 404 of the outer casing 102. Magnetic element 402 can vary widely. For example, the magnetic element 402 can be configured as an array on the protrusion 404 for attaching at least a portion of an accessory device to a particular aspect of the electronic device 100. For example, when the accessory device is in the form of a flap, the magnetic member 402 can be used to magnetically attach the flap to the electronic device 100 to cover at least a portion of the display. The size and shape of the array can also vary widely. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 8A, the array can be rectangular and sized to include a substantial portion of the protrusion 404.
圖8B顯示多個可被包含在一配件裝置內作為附著特徵構造216的一部分的磁性元件410。該等磁性元件410的一部分,但非全部,可對應磁性元件402且被用來將該配件200磁性地附著至該電子裝置100。在另一實施例中,所有或絕大部分的磁性元件410可被用來將配件裝置200的諸部分固定在一起以形成可以與該電子裝置100配合使用之其它支撐結構。在一實施例中,磁性元件414可被用來激活一磁性敏感電路,譬如霍耳效應感測器118。 FIG. 8B shows a plurality of magnetic elements 410 that can be included in a fitting device as part of the attachment feature formation 216. A portion, but not all, of the magnetic elements 410 may correspond to the magnetic element 402 and be used to magnetically attach the accessory 200 to the electronic device 100. In another embodiment, all or a substantial portion of the magnetic elements 410 can be used to secure portions of the accessory device 200 together to form other support structures that can be used with the electronic device 100. In an embodiment, the magnetic element 414 can be used to activate a magnetically sensitive circuit, such as the Hall effect sensor 118.
圖9A-9C顯示依據一被描述的實施例的代表性磁性附著特徵構造500。該磁性附著特徵構造500例如可對應於圖6及圖7A-7C所示的裝置附著特徵構造108。在不作用的狀態中,在該磁性附著特徵構造500內的磁性元件可被設置成遠離外殼102用以讓傳播(propagate)穿過外殼102的磁場線最少化。在另一方面,在有作用的狀態中,該等磁性元件可朝向該外殼102移動以增加傳播穿過該外殼102的磁場線的數量藉以滿足式(2)。 9A-9C show a representative magnetic attachment feature configuration 500 in accordance with a described embodiment. The magnetic attachment feature configuration 500 can correspond, for example, to the device attachment feature configuration 108 illustrated in Figures 6 and 7A-7C. In the inactive state, the magnetic elements within the magnetic attachment feature 500 can be placed away from the housing 102 to minimize the magnetic field lines propagating through the housing 102. In another aspect, in an active state, the magnetic elements can be moved toward the outer casing 102 to increase the number of magnetic field lines propagating through the outer casing 102 to satisfy equation (2).
該等磁性元件移動的方式可以廣泛地變化。在一例子中,該等磁性元件可轉動、樞轉、平移、滑移或類此者。在一例子中,該等磁性 元件可被設置在一可容許該等磁性元件從一對應於該不作用的第一位置滑移至一對應於該有作用的第二位置的通道內。 The manner in which the magnetic elements move can vary widely. In one example, the magnetic elements can be rotated, pivoted, translated, slipped, or the like. In an example, the magnetic properties The component can be disposed in a passage that allows the magnetic component to slide from a first position corresponding to the inoperative to a second position corresponding to the action.
在示於圖9A-9C的該特定的實施例中,該磁性附著特徵構造500可包括磁性元件502其具有在一段期間內保持穩定的磁特性。例如,該等磁性附著特性在該電子裝置100的預期使用壽命期間都保持穩定。以此方式,該等磁體的每一者的磁場的相互作用所形成的磁場亦將維持穩定。磁場的穩定性可產生一可重複的附著方法的結果。此可重複性在該電子裝置100經歷與其它被適當地建構之需要一持續地精確放置的物件,譬如配件裝置200,無數且重複的附著週期(附著/分離)的時候是特別有用的。 In this particular embodiment, shown in Figures 9A-9C, the magnetic attachment feature 500 can include a magnetic element 502 that has magnetic properties that remain stable over a period of time. For example, the magnetic attachment characteristics remain stable during the expected lifetime of the electronic device 100. In this way, the magnetic field created by the interaction of the magnetic fields of each of the magnets will also remain stable. The stability of the magnetic field produces the result of a repeatable attachment method. This repeatability is particularly useful when the electronic device 100 experiences an object that is continuously and accurately placed, such as the accessory device 200, with numerous and repeated attachment cycles (attachment/separation).
在所示的代表性實施例中,磁性元件502可以有許多形式。例如,磁性元件502可以是多個以特定的順序及具有穩定的磁特性(譬如,磁極及本徵(intrinsic)磁強度)的組態被配置的磁鐵的形式。然而,為了要在該磁性附著特徵構造500在不作用的狀態時滿足式(1),磁性元件502必需保持離外殼102的外部至少x=(x0+t)的距離。換言之,為了滿足式(1),該磁性附著特徵構造500的尺度必需至少考量磁性元件502的磁特性及實體佈局。 In the representative embodiment shown, the magnetic element 502 can take many forms. For example, magnetic element 502 can be in the form of a plurality of magnets configured in a particular order and configured with stable magnetic properties, such as magnetic poles and intrinsic magnetic strength. However, in order to satisfy equation (1) when the magnetic attachment feature configuration 500 is in an inactive state, the magnetic element 502 must maintain a distance of at least x = (x 0 + t) from the exterior of the outer casing 102. In other words, to satisfy equation (1), the dimensions of the magnetic attachment feature configuration 500 must consider at least the magnetic properties and physical layout of the magnetic element 502.
因此,磁性元件502可被附著至一被配置來施加保持力Fretain的保持機構(retaining mechanism)504。保持力Fretain可被用來在該裝置附著特徵構造500是在不作用的狀態中時將該磁性元件502保持在該裝置附著特徵構造500內的一個會產生很小或甚至沒有磁通量洩漏至該電子裝置100外(即,滿足式(1))的位置處。在一實施例中,該保持機構504可以是一被設置來根據式(6)提供保持力Fretain的彈簧的形式:Fretain=k‧△x 式(6) Thus, the magnetic element 502 can be attached to a retaining mechanism 504 configured to apply a retention force F retain . The retention force F retain can be used to maintain the magnetic element 502 within the device attachment feature configuration 500 when the device attachment feature 500 is in an inactive state, resulting in little or no leakage of magnetic flux to the The electronic device 100 is located outside (ie, satisfies the formula (1)). In an embodiment, the retaining mechanism 504 can be in the form of a spring that is configured to provide a retaining force F retain according to equation (6): F retain = k‧ Δx (6)
其中,k是保持機構504的彈簧常數,及△x為彈簧離平衡點的位移。 Where k is the spring constant of the holding mechanism 504, and Δx is the displacement of the spring from the equilibrium point.
例如,圖9B顯示該代表性的磁性附著特徵構造500在有作用的狀態。藉由適當地建構該磁性元件502及在該配件附著特徵構造204內的磁性元件,所得到的磁性元件502的磁場與配件附著特徵構造204產生的磁場的磁性相互作用可產生至少與激活該磁性附著特徵構造500所需的吸附磁力一樣大的淨吸附磁力。換言之,該淨吸附磁力可具有至少是滿足式(7)的激活力量Fact大小的大小,藉以克服保持力Fretain促使磁性元件502從該不作用的位置(即,x=0)移動至有作用的位置(即,x=x0),Fact≧Fretain(△x=x0) 式(7)。 For example, Figure 9B shows the representative magnetic attachment feature 500 in an active state. By properly constructing the magnetic element 502 and the magnetic element within the accessory attachment feature 204, the magnetic interaction of the resulting magnetic element 502 with the magnetic field generated by the accessory attachment feature 204 can produce at least the activation of the magnetic The net adsorption magnetic force that is as large as the adsorption magnetic force required for the attachment feature construction 500. In other words, the net adsorption magnetic force can have a magnitude that satisfies at least the magnitude of the activation force Fact of equation (7), thereby overcoming the retention force F retain causing the magnetic element 502 to move from the inactive position (ie, x=0) to The position of action (ie, x = x 0 ), F act ≧ F retain (Δx = x 0 ) Equation (7).
然而,只有產生具有與磁性元件502的磁場特性“匹配”的特性的磁場的另一磁性附著特徵構造才可以激活該磁性附著特徵構造500。因此,如圖9C所示,位在外殼102的外表面(即,x=x0+t)以磁活性材料(譬如,鋼)形成的物件506的存在無法激活該磁性附著特徵構造500。更明確地,在一實施例中,產生在該物件506與該磁性附著特徵構造500之間的淨磁吸力小於2NT,而激活力量FACT需要3NT的大小。 However, only the magnetic attachment feature configuration that produces a magnetic field having a characteristic that "matches" the magnetic field characteristics of the magnetic element 502 can activate the magnetic attachment feature configuration 500. Thus, as shown in FIG. 9C, the presence of an object 506 formed of a magnetically active material (eg, steel) on the outer surface of the outer casing 102 (ie, x = x 0 + t) cannot activate the magnetic attachment feature 500. More specifically, in one embodiment, the net magnetic attraction generated between the article 506 and the magnetic attachment feature 500 is less than 2 NT, and the activation force F ACT requires a size of 3 NT.
更明確地,為了要從不作用的狀態轉變成有作用的狀態,產生在磁性元件502與物件506之間的磁力必需大於該激活力量Fact。然而,由位在該外殼102的外表面的該磁性元件502產生的磁場的磁通量密度小於Bthreshold,產生在物件506與磁性元件502之間的任何磁力實質地小於Fretain,因此無法滿足式(7)。因此,磁性元件502保持著被固定在約x=0的定位處且磁性附著特徵構造500無法經歷從不作用的狀態變成有作用的狀態的轉變。 More specifically, in order to transition from an inactive state to an active state, the magnetic force generated between the magnetic element 502 and the object 506 must be greater than the activation force Fact . However, the magnetic flux density generated by the magnetic element 502 located on the outer surface of the outer casing 102 is less than B threshold , and any magnetic force generated between the object 506 and the magnetic element 502 is substantially smaller than F retain and thus cannot satisfy the formula ( 7). Thus, the magnetic element 502 remains fixed at a position of about x=0 and the magnetic attachment feature construct 500 cannot undergo a transition from an inactive state to an active state.
應被理解的是,該彈簧可廣泛地改變。例如,它可根據運動的種類而改變。它的例子包括張力彈簧、壓縮彈簧、扭力彈簧、板片彈簧及類此者。在一特定的實施方式中,板片彈簧被使用。 It should be understood that the spring can vary widely. For example, it can vary depending on the type of exercise. Examples thereof include tension springs, compression springs, torsion springs, leaf springs, and the like. In a particular embodiment, a leaf spring is used.
應指出的是,在一些實施例中,磁性元件502可用一種無需使用 彈簧的方式被固定。在這些實施例中,雖然式(1)無法被滿足,但它仍然是一可實施的配置。 It should be noted that in some embodiments, the magnetic element 502 can be used without one use. The spring is fixed. In these embodiments, although equation (1) cannot be satisfied, it is still an implementable configuration.
圖10顯示依據本發明的一個實施例的裝置附著特徵構造600的實施例。附著特徵構造600可對應於圖6及圖7A-7C中的元件208。此實施例類似於圖9A-9C所示的實施例,但不同處在於,使用的是多個機構或更明確地一對磁性元件602及磁性元件604形式的機構,而不是單一機構。詳言之,圖10顯示在有作用的狀態中的裝置附著特徵構造600。更明確地,附著至磁性元件602的彈簧606及附著至磁性元件604的彈簧608每一者都被延伸△x的距離。 FIG. 10 shows an embodiment of a device attachment feature configuration 600 in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention. Attachment feature 600 can correspond to element 208 in Figures 6 and 7A-7C. This embodiment is similar to the embodiment shown in Figures 9A-9C, but differs in that instead of a single mechanism, a plurality of mechanisms or more specifically a pair of magnetic elements 602 and magnetic elements 604 are used. In particular, Figure 10 shows the device attachment feature configuration 600 in an active state. More specifically, the spring 606 attached to the magnetic element 602 and the spring 608 attached to the magnetic element 604 are each extended by a distance of Δx.
在此系統中,該二機構合作以形成該磁場。它們可獨立地運動或它們可連接在一起並像一個單元般地運動。彈簧力及磁力可改變。例如,該系統可以是對稱的或不對稱的。該等磁性元件的配置可以是相類似的或是不同的。該等磁性元件的配置可以是對稱的或是不對稱的。該組態係依據該系統的需要而定。 In this system, the two mechanisms cooperate to form the magnetic field. They can move independently or they can be connected together and move like a unit. The spring force and magnetic force can be changed. For example, the system can be symmetrical or asymmetrical. The configuration of the magnetic elements can be similar or different. The configuration of the magnetic elements can be symmetrical or asymmetrical. This configuration is based on the needs of the system.
該磁性附著系統可以有許多形式,每一種形式都可提供可重複且精確的磁性附著機構,其可被用來將多個被適當地建構的物件附著在一起。 The magnetic attachment system can take many forms, each of which can provide a repeatable and precise magnetic attachment mechanism that can be used to attach a plurality of suitably constructed items together.
圖11A-11B顯示裝置附著特徵構造108以依據一實施例的裝置附著特徵構造700形式呈現的特定實施方式。該裝置附著特徵構造可對應於圖6及圖7A-7C所示的元件108。在一些例子中,裝置附著特徵構造700可與圖10所示的彈簧606及608配合使用。如圖11A所示,裝置附著特徵構造700被示出。詳言之,裝置附著特徵構造700是在不作用的狀態,其具有磁性組件702形式的磁性元件,該磁性組件可被包覆在一包封物內。以此方式,一附著於該磁性組件702的保持機構(未示出)可施加相關連的保持力Fretain。保持力Fretain可被用來將該磁性組件702保持在一個與處在不作用的狀態的該裝置附著特徵構造700一致的 位置(即,滿足式(1))。 11A-11B show a particular embodiment of the device attachment feature configuration 108 in the form of a device attachment feature configuration 700 in accordance with an embodiment. The device attachment feature configuration may correspond to element 108 shown in Figures 6 and 7A-7C. In some examples, device attachment feature 700 can be used in conjunction with springs 606 and 608 shown in FIG. As shown in Figure 11A, device attachment feature 700 is shown. In particular, the device attachment feature 700 is in an inactive state having a magnetic component in the form of a magnetic component 702 that can be wrapped within an enclosure. In this manner, a retention mechanism (not shown) attached to the magnetic assembly 702 can apply an associated retention force F retain . The retention force F retain can be used to maintain the magnetic assembly 702 in a position consistent with the device attachment feature configuration 700 in an inactive state (ie, satisfying equation (1)).
磁性組件702每一者都包括個別的磁鐵。在被描述的實施例中,該等個別的磁鐵可被置成一結構,在該結構中磁鐵的磁極可被定向以形成一經過編碼的(coded)磁性結構。該經過編碼的磁性結構可用一連串的磁極及在一些例子中磁強度來形成。換言之,該一連串的磁極可用例如{+1,+1,-1,+1,-1,+1,-1,-1}來表示。在此特定的例子中,“+1”係指該磁鐵的方向及強度。因此,正號“+”表示被對準的相對應的磁鐵具有在一特定的方向上的磁向量,負號“-”表示在一相反方向上的磁向量,“1”表示一單位磁鐵的強度。 Magnetic components 702 each include individual magnets. In the depicted embodiment, the individual magnets can be configured in a configuration in which the magnetic poles of the magnet can be oriented to form a coded magnetic structure. The encoded magnetic structure can be formed using a series of magnetic poles and, in some examples, magnetic strength. In other words, the series of magnetic poles can be represented by, for example, {+1, +1, -1, +1, -1, +1, -1, -1}. In this particular example, "+1" refers to the direction and strength of the magnet. Thus, the positive sign "+" indicates that the corresponding magnet being aligned has a magnetic vector in a particular direction, the minus sign "-" indicates the magnetic vector in the opposite direction, and the "1" indicates the unit magnet. strength.
當多個相同磁極的磁鐵被彼此緊鄰地放置時,來自該等磁鐵的每一者的磁場可相結合致使該等磁體可被視為等同於一單一的磁鐵,該單一磁鐵具有該等磁鐵的結合的特性。例如,代表八個個別的磁鐵的該經過編碼的磁性序列{+1,+1,-1,+1,-1,+1,-1,-1}可被視為等同於體現為六個個別的磁鐵的陣列之經過編碼的磁性序列{+2,-1,+1,-1,+1,-2}。在一實施例中,在第一個及最後一個位置的磁鐵可具有與該陣列中其它磁鐵相同的磁性強度但大小是其它磁鐵的兩倍大。在另一方面,在第一個及最後一個位置的磁鐵可具有與該陣列中其它磁鐵大致相同的大小但磁強度是其它磁鐵的兩倍。在任何一種情況中,磁特性的等同性可提供一更小巧的經過邊碼的磁鐵序列。較小的尺寸有助於減輕重量且可保留容納該磁性附著特徵構造所需之有價值的內部空間。此外,因為磁通量密度與磁場線傳播通過的面積直接相關,所以一給定的磁通量傳播通過的面積減小時,所得到的磁通量密度就會提高。 When a plurality of magnets of the same magnetic pole are placed in close proximity to one another, the magnetic fields from each of the magnets can be combined such that the magnets can be considered equivalent to a single magnet having the magnets Combined characteristics. For example, the encoded magnetic sequence {+1, +1, -1, +1, -1, +1, -1, -1} representing eight individual magnets can be considered equivalent to six The encoded magnetic sequence of the array of individual magnets {+2, -1, +1, -1, +1, -2}. In one embodiment, the magnets in the first and last positions may have the same magnetic strength as the other magnets in the array but are twice as large as the other magnets. On the other hand, the magnets in the first and last positions may have substantially the same size as the other magnets in the array but have twice the magnetic strength of the other magnets. In either case, the equivalence of magnetic properties provides a smaller sequence of edge-coded magnets. The smaller size helps to reduce weight and preserves the valuable interior space required to accommodate the magnetic attachment feature. In addition, since the magnetic flux density is directly related to the area through which the magnetic field lines propagate, the resulting magnetic flux density increases as the area through which a given magnetic flux propagates decreases.
在一實施例中,磁性組件702可包括個別的磁鐵712a,712b,及712c其分別具有2L,1L及1L的相對尺寸,其中“L”表示一單位長度。應指出的是,如上文所討論的,一具有“2L”相對尺寸的磁鐵可被體現 為一個具有“2L”的實體長度的單一磁鐵、兩個具有“1L”長度之並置的磁鐵且它們的磁極彼此對準、或一個具有單元長度L及磁性強度是其它磁鐵的兩倍的磁鐵。因此,對於此討論的其餘部分而言,關於2L及1L的用詞,“L”可代表一個單元長度且該磁鐵的相對強度可用相關連的數字來表示。例如,一具有相對磁性強度為“1”但長度為“2L”的磁鐵可被視為等同於一具有相對磁性強度為“2”且長度為“1L”的磁鐵。以此方式,相對磁性強度及方位這兩者都可被用來形成該經過編碼的磁性結構。 In one embodiment, the magnetic component 702 can include individual magnets 712a, 712b, and 712c having relative dimensions of 2L, 1L, and 1L, respectively, where "L" represents a unit length. It should be noted that as discussed above, a magnet having a relative size of "2L" can be embodied It is a single magnet having a solid length of "2L", two juxtaposed magnets having a length of "1L" and their magnetic poles are aligned with each other, or a magnet having a unit length L and a magnetic strength twice that of other magnets. Thus, for the remainder of this discussion, with respect to the terms 2L and 1L, "L" may represent a unit length and the relative strength of the magnet may be represented by an associated number. For example, a magnet having a relative magnetic strength of "1" but a length of "2L" can be regarded as equivalent to a magnet having a relative magnetic strength of "2" and a length of "1L". In this way, both relative magnetic strength and orientation can be used to form the encoded magnetic structure.
例如,磁鐵712a可具有一約為磁鐵712b或712c的長度的兩倍的整體長度。在另一方面,磁鐵712a可具有與磁鐵712b及712c相同的長度,但具有一磁性強度其為磁鐵712b及712c的磁性強度的兩倍。在另一實施例中,磁鐵712a可以是一用兩個(或更多個)磁極被對準的組成磁鐵(constituent rmagnets)所形成的等效磁鐵。 For example, magnet 712a can have an overall length that is approximately twice the length of magnet 712b or 712c. On the other hand, the magnet 712a may have the same length as the magnets 712b and 712c, but has a magnetic strength which is twice the magnetic strength of the magnets 712b and 712c. In another embodiment, the magnet 712a can be an equivalent magnet formed of two constituent magnets that are aligned with two (or more) magnetic poles.
在一實施例中,磁鐵712a,712b,712c彼此係被間隔開一預定的距離。例如,在一實施例中,該等磁鐵彼此被間隔開一相同的距離。此間距當然是根據被產生的磁場之所想要的磁特性。在另一實施例中,那些具有非對準的磁極的磁鐵可彼此磁性地附著。以此方式,形成在相鄰的磁鐵之間之磁性的結合可被用來保持在該磁性組件中該磁鐵序列的完整性。然而,那些具有對準的磁極的磁鐵必需藉由可克服產生在兩對準的磁鐵之間相斥的磁力之外部施加的力量來將它們保持在一起。 In one embodiment, the magnets 712a, 712b, 712c are spaced apart from one another by a predetermined distance. For example, in one embodiment, the magnets are spaced apart from one another by the same distance. This spacing is of course based on the desired magnetic properties of the magnetic field being generated. In another embodiment, those magnets having non-aligned magnetic poles may be magnetically attached to each other. In this manner, a magnetic bond formed between adjacent magnets can be used to maintain the integrity of the magnet sequence in the magnetic assembly. However, those magnets with aligned poles must hold them together by the force exerted against the outside of the magnetic force that creates a repulsive relationship between the two aligned magnets.
除了尺寸與位置之外,磁鐵712a,712b,712c的磁極可根據被產生的磁場之所想要的特性來加以選擇。然而,在所示的實施例中,磁性元件彼此端對端地磁性耦合藉以減少所需的空間且藉由縮小磁場線傳播通過的整體區域來提高磁通量密度。 In addition to size and position, the magnetic poles of the magnets 712a, 712b, 712c can be selected based on the desired characteristics of the magnetic field being generated. However, in the illustrated embodiment, the magnetic elements are magnetically coupled end to end to reduce the space required and to increase the magnetic flux density by reducing the overall area through which the magnetic field lines propagate.
詳言之,磁性組件702可具有一特定的極性模式組,在該極性模 式組中磁鐵712a,712b,712c以一種它們的N或S磁極以特定方式予以對準(或未對準)的方式被定向。例如,在磁性組件702中的磁鐵可被配置成形成第一經過編碼的磁性結構{+1,-1,+1},在該磁性結構中磁鐵712a,712b,712c的磁極係根據第一極性模式{P1,P2,P1}予以對準,該極性模式表示磁鐵712a的磁極相關於磁鐵712b是未對準的,磁鐵712b相關於磁鐵712c是未對準的。 In particular, the magnetic component 702 can have a particular set of polarity patterns in which the polarity mode The magnets 712a, 712b, 712c of the group are oriented in such a way that their N or S poles are aligned (or misaligned) in a particular manner. For example, the magnets in the magnetic assembly 702 can be configured to form a first encoded magnetic structure {+1, -1, +1} in which the magnetic poles of the magnets 712a, 712b, 712c are based on the first polarity The pattern {P1, P2, P1} is aligned, the polarity pattern indicating that the magnetic pole of the magnet 712a is misaligned with respect to the magnet 712b, and the magnet 712b is misaligned with respect to the magnet 712c.
磁性組件702亦可包括個別的磁鐵714a,714b,714c且分別具有1L,1L及2L的相對尺寸。又,磁鐵714a,714b,714c可被配置成它們各自的磁極係根據第二極性模式{P2,P1,P2}予以對準,該第二極性模式與第一極性模式{P1,P2,P1}相反(或互補)。就該經過編碼的磁性結構而言,磁鐵714a,714b,714c可根據第二編碼的磁性序列{-1,+1,-1}予以對準,該第二編碼的磁性序列與第一編碼的磁性序列{+1,-1,+1}相反或互補。磁鐵712a,712b,712c與714a,714b,714c之間非對稱的關係提供一相對於中心線716非對稱的磁場。 Magnetic component 702 can also include individual magnets 714a, 714b, 714c and have relative dimensions of 1L, 1L, and 2L, respectively. Also, the magnets 714a, 714b, 714c may be arranged such that their respective magnetic poles are aligned according to a second polarity mode {P2, P1, P2}, the second polarity mode and the first polarity mode {P1, P2, P1} The opposite (or complementary). With respect to the encoded magnetic structure, the magnets 714a, 714b, 714c can be aligned according to the second encoded magnetic sequence {-1, +1, -1}, the second encoded magnetic sequence and the first encoded The magnetic sequence {+1, -1, +1} is opposite or complementary. The asymmetrical relationship between magnets 712a, 712b, 712c and 714a, 714b, 714c provides a magnetic field that is asymmetric with respect to centerline 716.
圖11A及11B亦顯示配件附著特徵構造800的特定實施方式,該配件附著特徵構造可對應於圖6及圖7A-7C所示的元件202。磁性組件802可包括數個磁性元件。該等磁性元件可用一種該結合的磁場與該磁性組件702的磁場相匹配的方式來予以配置。 11A and 11B also show a particular embodiment of an accessory attachment feature configuration 800 that can correspond to element 202 shown in Figures 6 and 7A-7C. Magnetic component 802 can include a number of magnetic components. The magnetic elements can be configured in such a manner that the combined magnetic field matches the magnetic field of the magnetic assembly 702.
磁性組件802可包括磁鐵802a,802b,802c,每一磁鐵與磁性組件702中對應的磁鐵712a,712b,712c的大小大致相同。然而,為了要將淨磁吸力Fnet最大化並將磁場間的磁性相互作用驅使至一所想要的平衡,磁鐵802a,802b,802c根據第二極性模式{P2,P1,P2}予以對準。磁性組件802亦可包括磁鐵804a,804b,804c,每一磁鐵都與對應的磁鐵714a,714b,714c的大小大致相同。又,為了要保持磁場之間磁互動的整體目標在所想要的裝置組態是平衡的,磁鐵804a,804b,804c可根據第一極性模式{P1,P2,P1}予以對準。 The magnetic assembly 802 can include magnets 802a, 802b, 802c, each of which is substantially the same size as the corresponding magnets 712a, 712b, 712c of the magnetic assembly 702. However, in order to maximize the net magnetic attraction F net and drive the magnetic interaction between the magnetic fields to a desired balance, the magnets 802a, 802b, 802c are aligned according to the second polarity pattern {P2, P1, P2}. . The magnetic assembly 802 can also include magnets 804a, 804b, 804c, each of which is substantially the same size as the corresponding magnets 714a, 714b, 714c. Again, in order to maintain the overall goal of magnetic interaction between the magnetic fields balanced in the desired device configuration, the magnets 804a, 804b, 804c can be aligned according to the first polarity pattern {P1, P2, P1}.
圖11B顯示裝置附著特徵構造700因為磁性組件702與802之間的磁性相互作用而處在該有作用的狀態。詳言之,因為裝置附著特徵構造700的磁性元件的配置與配件附著特徵構造800的磁性元件的配置“相匹配”,所以磁場之間的磁性相互作用可造成磁性組件702從不作用的狀態(即,x=0)移動至該有作用的狀態(即,x=x0)。 FIG. 11B shows device attachment feature 700 in this active state due to magnetic interaction between magnetic components 702 and 802. In particular, because the configuration of the magnetic elements of the device attachment feature 700 "matches" the configuration of the magnetic elements of the accessory attachment feature configuration 800, the magnetic interaction between the magnetic fields can cause the magnetic assembly 702 to be inactive ( That is, x = 0) moves to the active state (ie, x = x 0 ).
圖12例示用於該磁性組件702的磁性結構與磁性組件802的互補磁性結構之一連串的相對移位位置。磁性組件702係用經過編碼的序列{+2,-1,+1,-1,+1,-2}來予以編碼。磁性組件802係用經過編碼的序列{-2,+1,-1,+1,-1,+2}來予以編碼。對於此例子而言,該等磁鐵可具有相同或實質相同的磁場強度(或振幅),為了此例子,此磁場強度被提供以1為一單元(其中A=相吸,R=相斥,A=-R,A=1,R=-1)。在此例子中,磁性組件702及802相對於彼此每次被移動一“1L”的長度(應指出的是,相對於該經過編碼的磁性序列的中心線716非對稱可讓向左移位的結果對映出(mirror)向右移位的結果,所以只有向右移位被示出)。 Figure 12 illustrates a series of relative displacement positions of the magnetic structure of the magnetic assembly 702 and one of the complementary magnetic structures of the magnetic assembly 802. Magnetic component 702 is encoded with an encoded sequence {+2, -1, +1, -1, +1, -2}. Magnetic component 802 is encoded with an encoded sequence {-2, +1, -1, +1, -1, +2}. For this example, the magnets may have the same or substantially the same magnetic field strength (or amplitude). For this example, the magnetic field strength is provided as a unit (where A = phase absorption, R = phase exclusion, A =-R, A=1, R=-1). In this example, magnetic components 702 and 802 are each moved a length of "1 L" relative to each other (it should be noted that asymmetry relative to centerline 716 of the encoded magnetic sequence can be shifted to the left) The result is the result of mirroring the shift to the right, so only the shift to the right is shown).
對於每一相對的對而言,相斥的磁鐵的數量加上相吸的磁鐵的數量都被計算,每一對準都具有依據一磁力函數的總力,該磁力函數係以該等磁鐵的磁場強度為根據。換言之,第一及第二磁鐵結構間的總磁力是由在沿著該結構從左至右的每一磁鐵位置之與位在相對立的磁鐵結構中直接相對的對應磁鐵相互作用的每一磁鐵或磁鐵對的個別力量總和來決定的。當只有一個磁鐵存在時,對應的磁鐵是是0,且該力量為0。當有兩個磁鐵存在時,每一單元磁鐵的力量為R(相同磁極)或A(相反磁極)。 For each opposing pair, the number of repulsive magnets plus the number of attracting magnets is calculated, each alignment having a total force in accordance with a magnetic function that is based on the magnets The strength of the magnetic field is based on. In other words, the total magnetic force between the first and second magnet structures is each magnet that interacts with the corresponding magnet directly in the opposite magnet structure at each magnet position from left to right along the structure. Or the sum of the individual forces of the magnet pair is determined. When only one magnet is present, the corresponding magnet is 0 and the force is zero. When two magnets are present, the force of each unit magnet is R (same pole) or A (opposite pole).
每一圖的總磁力可被計算且與每一的相對移位值一起被顯示。因此,使用一特定的經過編碼的磁性序列{+2,-1,+1,-1,+1,-2}可得到變動範圍從-3(即,3R)至+8(即,+8A)的淨磁吸力Fnet,其中峰值 是在磁性組件702與802被對準使得它們各自的碼亦被對準時發生。應指出的是,離峰的淨磁吸力係變動於-3至+4之間。因此,該淨磁吸力可造成該磁性組件702大體上彼此相斥,除非它們被對準致使它們的磁鐵的每一者與一互補的磁鐵相互關聯(即,一磁鐵的南極與另一磁鐵的北極對準,或反之亦可)。換言之,磁性組件702與802在它們被對準使得它們實質上彼此相對映的時候是高度相互關聯的。 The total magnetic force of each graph can be calculated and displayed along with the relative shift value for each. Therefore, using a particular encoded magnetic sequence {+2, -1, +1, -1, +1, -2}, the range of variation can be obtained from -3 (ie, 3R) to +8 (ie, +8A). ) net magnetic attractive force F net, in which the peak magnetic assembly 702 and 802 are aligned such that their respective codes are aligned were also occur. It should be noted that the net magnetic attraction from the peak varies between -3 and +4. Thus, the net magnetic attraction can cause the magnetic components 702 to substantially repel each other unless they are aligned such that each of their magnets is associated with a complementary magnet (ie, the south pole of one magnet and the other magnet) The North Pole is aligned, or vice versa). In other words, the magnetic components 702 and 802 are highly correlated when they are aligned such that they are substantially opposite each other.
應指出的是,當磁性組件702與802相位差180°時(即,類似於頭尾沒有對準,亦被稱為上下顛倒),所產生的淨磁力可以是8R。因此,藉由使用磁性組件702及802而彼此磁性地附著的裝置被上下顛倒地附著是極不可能的。 It should be noted that when the magnetic components 702 and 802 are 180 degrees out of phase (i.e., similar to head and tail misalignment, also referred to as upside down), the resulting net magnetic force may be 8R. Therefore, it is highly unlikely that the devices magnetically attached to each other by using the magnetic members 702 and 802 are attached upside down.
圖13例示函數FNET(L)的圖表。函數FNET(L)描述淨磁力FNET為圖12所示磁性組件702及磁性組件802內的經過編碼的磁鐵結構的移位位移(L)的函數。應指出的是,在磁性組件702及802中該等經過編碼的磁鐵結構相對於中心線716對稱本質提供該函數FNET(L)相對於中心線716是不對稱的。以此方式,圖12的結果可被畫在中心線716的右側且相對於中心線716被反射以位在圖表900的左側。 Figure 13 illustrates a graph of the function F NET (L). The function F NET (L) describes the net magnetic force F NET as a function of the displacement displacement (L) of the encoded magnet structure in the magnetic component 702 and the magnetic component 802 shown in FIG. It should be noted that the encoded magnet structures in magnetic components 702 and 802 provide a symmetric nature of the function F NET (L) relative to the centerline 716 with respect to the centerline 716. In this manner, the results of FIG. 12 can be drawn to the right of centerline 716 and reflected relative to centerline 716 to be positioned to the left of chart 900.
如圖13所示,函數FNET(L)在磁性組件702及802相互關聯於一個對應於中心線716的位置時具有一全域最大值(global maximum)。換言之,當磁性組件702及802中具有相反磁極的所有磁性元件彼此對準時,函數FNET(L=0)達到最大值(即,8A)。任何其它的組態(即,函數FNET(L≠0))得到的結果是淨磁力FNET小於該全域最大值(8A)。然而,應進一步被指出的是,該函數FNET(L)具有至少兩個局部最大值(即,函數FNET(L=±3))其允許磁性組件702與802之間有一弱的附著。然而,一強的耐久的附著只會在與該磁性組件702相關聯的該裝置磁性附著特徵構造700被適當地激活時才發生。因此,藉由建立滿足式(8)的激活力FACT,即可避免該裝置磁性附著特徵構造700的一“假的激活 (false activation)”或磁性裝置702與802之間一弱的附著。 As shown in FIG. 13, the function F NET (L) has a global maximum when the magnetic components 702 and 802 are associated with each other at a position corresponding to the centerline 716. In other words, when all of the magnetic elements having the opposite magnetic poles in the magnetic components 702 and 802 are aligned with each other, the function F NET (L = 0) reaches a maximum value (i.e., 8A). The result of any other configuration (ie, function F NET (L≠0)) is that the net magnetic force F NET is less than the global maximum (8A). However, it should be further noted that the function F NET (L) has at least two local maxima (i.e., the function F NET (L = ± 3)) which allows for a weak attachment between the magnetic components 702 and 802. However, a strong durable attachment will only occur when the device magnetic attachment feature 700 associated with the magnetic component 702 is properly activated. Thus, by establishing an activation force F ACT that satisfies equation (8), a "false activation" of the device magnetic attachment feature 700 or a weak attachment between the magnetic devices 702 and 802 can be avoided.
FNET(L=局部最大值)≦FACT≦FNET(L=全域最大值)式(8)。 F NET (L = local maximum) ≦ F ACT ≦ F NET (L = global maximum) Equation (8).
應指出的是,該激活力FACT與式(6)的保持力Fretain有關。以此方式,考慮到函數FNET(L),式(6)及式(8)可被用來決定彈簧常數k的一適合的數值。 It should be noted that the activation force F ACT is related to the retention force F retain of the formula (6). In this way, equations (6) and (8) can be used to determine a suitable value for the spring constant k, taking into account the function F NET (L).
圖14及15顯示磁性元件可被除直地且水平地配置的其它實施例。此外,該等磁性元件的大小可被作成其磁極亦水平地及垂直地延伸。例如,配置1000顯示兩列磁性元件,其中每一磁性元件的高度H係延伸在垂直方向上。在所示的配置中,每一被垂直地設置的磁性元件具有相同的磁極其形成等效的磁性結構1002。換言之,配置1000及配置1002兩者都可被特徵為具有經過編碼的磁性序列{+2,-2,+2,-2,+2,-2}。 Figures 14 and 15 show other embodiments in which the magnetic elements can be disposed apart from straight and horizontal. Furthermore, the magnetic elements can be sized such that their magnetic poles also extend horizontally and vertically. For example, configuration 1000 displays two columns of magnetic elements, wherein the height H of each magnetic element extends in a vertical direction. In the configuration shown, each of the vertically disposed magnetic elements have the same magnetic polarity to form an equivalent magnetic structure 1002. In other words, both configuration 1000 and configuration 1002 can be characterized as having an encoded magnetic sequence {+2, -2, +2, -2, +2, -2}.
圖15顯示依據被描述的實施例而被建構成二維度的經過編碼的磁性序列1004的磁性陣列的頂視圖。該二維度的經過編碼的磁性序列1004可被用來將該結合的磁場延伸於一伸展在x及y方向上的整個區域上。此一延展區域可產生磁通量的增加及淨磁吸力同量的(commensurate)增加。除了提供一改善的磁性附著之外,該二維度的經過編碼的磁性序列1004可近似(approximate)非整數值的磁特性,譬如磁強度。例如,藉由該磁性配置1004,各式構件的磁場可結合以近似該經過編碼的磁性序列{+1.5,-1.5,+1.5,-1.5,+1.5,-1.5}。又,該二維度的經過編碼的磁性序列1004除了水平對準之外還有助於提供垂直對準。 Figure 15 shows a top view of a magnetic array of encoded magnetic sequence 1004 constructed to be two dimensional in accordance with the described embodiment. The two-dimensional encoded magnetic sequence 1004 can be used to extend the combined magnetic field over an entire area extending in the x and y directions. This extended region produces an increase in magnetic flux and a constant increase in net magnetic attraction. In addition to providing an improved magnetic attachment, the two-dimensional encoded magnetic sequence 1004 can approximate non-integer magnetic properties, such as magnetic strength. For example, with the magnetic configuration 1004, the magnetic fields of the various components can be combined to approximate the encoded magnetic sequence {+1.5, -1.5, +1.5, -1.5, +1.5, -1.5}. Again, the two-dimensional encoded magnetic sequence 1004 helps to provide vertical alignment in addition to horizontal alignment.
關於此討論的剩餘部分,配件裝置200的各式實施例將被討論。 With regard to the remainder of this discussion, various embodiments of accessory device 200 will be discussed.
在一實施例中,配件裝置200可包括多個保護元件其可被用來保護該電子裝置100的某些部分。例如,配件裝置200可以是一保護蓋的形式。該保護蓋可包括一摺片(flap)其樞軸地連接至一鉸鏈組件。該 鉸鏈組件接著可藉由配件附著特徵構造202而被耦接至該電子裝置100。以此方式,該摺片部分可被用作為一保護蓋以保護該電子裝置100的一些部分,譬如顯示器。該摺片可用各式材料來形成,譬如像是塑膠、布料、等等。該摺片可以一種該摺片的一區段可被掀起來以露出該顯示器的對應部分的方式予以區段化。該摺片亦可包括一功能性元件其可與該電子裝置100內的一對應的功能性元件合作。以此方式,操縱該摺片可造成改變該電子裝置100的操作的結果。 In an embodiment, the accessory device 200 can include a plurality of protective components that can be used to protect certain portions of the electronic device 100. For example, accessory device 200 can be in the form of a protective cover. The protective cover can include a flap that is pivotally coupled to a hinge assembly. The The hinge assembly can then be coupled to the electronic device 100 by the accessory attachment feature 202. In this manner, the flap portion can be used as a protective cover to protect portions of the electronic device 100, such as a display. The flaps can be formed from a variety of materials such as plastic, cloth, and the like. The flap may be segmented in such a manner that a section of the flap can be picked up to reveal a corresponding portion of the display. The flap may also include a functional component that cooperates with a corresponding functional component within the electronic device 100. In this manner, manipulating the flap can result in a change in the operation of the electronic device 100.
該摺片可包括磁性材料其可被用來根據例如霍耳效應來激活該電子裝置100內的一磁性敏感電路。該磁性敏感電路可藉由產生一訊號來回應,該訊號接著可被用來改變該電子裝置100的操作狀態。因為該保護蓋無需緊固件即可輕易地直接附著至平板裝置的外殼,所以該保護蓋可實質地順著該電子裝置100的形狀。以此方式,該保護蓋將不會減損或以其它方式妨礙該電子裝置100的外觀及質感。 The flaps can include a magnetic material that can be used to activate a magnetically sensitive circuit within the electronic device 100 in accordance with, for example, the Hall effect. The magnetic sensitive circuit can be responsive by generating a signal that can then be used to change the operational state of the electronic device 100. Since the protective cover can be easily attached directly to the outer casing of the tablet device without a fastener, the protective cover can substantially follow the shape of the electronic device 100. In this manner, the protective cover will not detract or otherwise interfere with the appearance and texture of the electronic device 100.
在一實施例中,該配件裝置200可被用來強化該電子裝置100的整體功能性。例如,該配件裝置200可被建構來當作一懸掛設備般地作用。當磁性地附著至電子裝置100時,配件裝置200可被用來懸掛該電子裝置100。以此方式,電子裝置100可被用當作一用來呈現視覺內容(譬如藝術、電影、照片、等等)的顯示器。作為一懸掛設備,該配件裝置200可被用來將該電子裝置100懸掛於一牆壁或屋頂上。該電子裝置100可單純地藉由施加一足以克服該淨磁吸力FNET的釋開力量而被取下。該配件裝置200可被留在原處且可在稍後被用來重新附著該電子裝置100(或另一裝置)。 In an embodiment, the accessory device 200 can be used to enhance the overall functionality of the electronic device 100. For example, the accessory device 200 can be constructed to function as a suspension device. When magnetically attached to the electronic device 100, the accessory device 200 can be used to suspend the electronic device 100. In this manner, electronic device 100 can be used as a display for presenting visual content such as art, movies, photos, and the like. As a suspension device, the accessory device 200 can be used to hang the electronic device 100 on a wall or roof. The electronic device 100 can be removed simply by applying a release force sufficient to overcome the net magnetic attraction F NET . The accessory device 200 can be left in place and can be used later to reattach the electronic device 100 (or another device).
在一實施例中,該配件裝置200亦可以是一用來讓本身無法磁性地附著至該電子裝置100的物件附著至電子裝置的固持機構的形式。例如,配件裝置200可被建構來攜載一電筆(stylus)或其它輸入裝置。該電筆可被用來提供輸入至該電子裝置100。在一些例子中,該配件 裝置200可提供一訊號至該電子裝置100,該訊號指出該電筆的存在。該訊號可造成該電子裝置100進入例如一電筆辨識狀態。詳言之,當該配件裝置200被磁性地附著至電子裝置100時,電子裝置100可激活一電筆輸入狀態以辨識電筆類型的輸入。當該配件裝置200被移走時,電子裝置100可停止該電筆輸入狀態。以此方式,該電筆在需要時可以很方便地附著至該電子裝置100或從電子裝置100取下。 In an embodiment, the accessory device 200 can also be in the form of a holding mechanism for attaching an object that is not magnetically attached to the electronic device 100 to the electronic device. For example, accessory device 200 can be constructed to carry a stylus or other input device. The stylus can be used to provide input to the electronic device 100. In some examples, the accessory The device 200 can provide a signal to the electronic device 100 indicating the presence of the electric pen. The signal can cause the electronic device 100 to enter, for example, a pen recognition state. In detail, when the accessory device 200 is magnetically attached to the electronic device 100, the electronic device 100 can activate an electric pen input state to recognize the input of the electric pen type. When the accessory device 200 is removed, the electronic device 100 can stop the electric pen input state. In this way, the stylus can be easily attached to or detached from the electronic device 100 when needed.
配件裝置200可以是一可被用來強化該電子裝置100的功能性的支撐件的形式。例如,該配件裝置200可被建構顯示器座台般地作用,該電子裝置100的顯示器在該配件裝置上可以一舒適的觀看角度,譬如75°,來觀看。換言之,當被放置在一水平的表面(譬如,一桌子或書桌)上時,該配件裝置200可用一種呈現於該顯示器的視覺內容能夠以約75°的視角加以觀看的方式來支撐該該電子裝置100。 Accessory device 200 can be in the form of a support that can be used to enhance the functionality of the electronic device 100. For example, the accessory device 200 can be configured to function as a display stand on which the display of the electronic device 100 can be viewed at a comfortable viewing angle, such as 75°. In other words, when placed on a horizontal surface (such as a table or desk), the accessory device 200 can support the electronic content in a manner that can be viewed at a viewing angle of about 75° with a visual content presented to the display. Device 100.
該配件裝置200亦可以是一種用來加強該電子裝置100在鍵盤狀態時的功能性的支撐件形式。在鍵盤狀態時,該配件裝置200可被用來以符合人體工學的角度呈現一觸碰鍵盤表面。以此方式,輸入觸碰事件可以在一不會讓使用者的手腕、手、手臂等等過度負擔的角度下來實施(例如對一虛擬鍵盤實施)。 The accessory device 200 can also be in the form of a support for enhancing the functionality of the electronic device 100 in the state of the keyboard. In the keyboard state, the accessory device 200 can be used to present a touch keyboard surface at an ergonomic perspective. In this manner, the input touch event can be implemented at an angle that does not burden the user's wrists, hands, arms, etc. (eg, on a virtual keyboard).
此討論的剩餘部分將描述可使用該磁性附著系統的裝置的特定實施例。詳言之,圖16A及16B以立體頂視圖的方式顯示以平板裝置1100形式呈現的電子裝置且該配件裝置200係以蓋子組件1200來呈現。這些元件大體上對應於上文中提到的任何一者。詳言之,圖16A及16B顯示平板裝置1100與蓋子組件1200在打開形態時的立體圖。例如,圖16A顯示包括在該平板裝置1100內的裝置附著特徵構造108及其與該平板裝置1100的關係。另一方面,圖16B則是圖16A轉180°的圖式以提供附著特徵構造202及其與該蓋子組件1200的關係的第二視圖。 The remainder of this discussion will describe a particular embodiment of an apparatus in which the magnetic attachment system can be used. In particular, FIGS. 16A and 16B show the electronic device presented in the form of a tablet device 1100 in a stereo top view and the accessory device 200 is presented in a cover assembly 1200. These elements generally correspond to any of the above mentioned. In particular, Figures 16A and 16B show perspective views of the tablet device 1100 and the lid assembly 1200 in an open configuration. For example, FIG. 16A shows device attachment features 108 included in the tablet device 1100 and its relationship to the tablet device 1100. 16B is a diagram of FIG. 16A rotated 180° to provide an attachment feature 202 and a second view of the lid assembly 1200.
該平板裝置1100可以是一平板運算裝置的形式,譬如像是由設在美國加州Cupertino市的Apple公司所製造的iPADTM。現參考圖16A,平板裝置1100可包括外殼1102其可包圍並支撐該裝置附著特徵構造108。為了不與該裝置附著特徵構造108所產生的磁場相干擾,至少該外殼1102靠近該裝置附著特徵構造108的部分可用任何數目的非磁性材料(譬如像是,塑膠或非磁性金屬,如鋁)來形成。外殼1102亦可包圍及支撐內部的各式結構構件及電子構件(包括積體電路晶片及其它電路)以提供該平板裝置1100的運送操作。外殼1102可包括用來放置該等內部構件的開口1104且可被作成能夠容納一顯示器組件或適合經由例如一顯示器提供使用者視覺內容的系統的大小。在一些例子中,該顯示器組件可包括觸碰敏感能力以提供使用者能夠使用觸碰輸入來提供觸覺(tactile)輸入至該平板裝置1100的能力。該顯示器組件可用數個層來形成,其包括用聚碳酸酯或其它適合的塑膠或經過高度拋光的玻璃製成之透明的覆蓋玻璃1106形式的最上層。藉由使用經過高度拋光的玻璃,該覆蓋玻璃1106可以是實質填滿該開口1104的覆蓋玻璃1106的形式。 The electronic device 1100 may be in the form of a tablet computing device, such as provided by a like iPAD TM Cupertino, California, manufactured by Apple Corporation. Referring now to Figure 16A, a tablet device 1100 can include a housing 1102 that can enclose and support the device attachment feature 108. In order not to interfere with the magnetic field generated by the device attachment feature 108, at least the portion of the housing 1102 adjacent to the device attachment feature 108 can be any number of non-magnetic materials (such as, for example, plastic or non-magnetic metals such as aluminum). To form. The outer casing 1102 can also surround and support various internal structural members and electronic components (including integrated circuit chips and other circuits) to provide a transport operation of the tablet device 1100. The housing 1102 can include an opening 1104 for placing the internal components and can be sized to accommodate a display assembly or a system adapted to provide visual content to the user via, for example, a display. In some examples, the display assembly can include touch sensitive capabilities to provide the user with the ability to use tactile input to provide tactile input to the tablet device 1100. The display assembly can be formed in a number of layers comprising an uppermost layer in the form of a transparent cover glass 1106 made of polycarbonate or other suitable plastic or highly polished glass. By using highly polished glass, the cover glass 1106 can be in the form of a cover glass 1106 that substantially fills the opening 1104.
雖然未示出,但在該覆蓋玻璃1106底下的該顯示器組件可被用來藉由使用任何適合的顯示技術,譬如LCD、LED、OLED、電子或電子墨水等等,來顯示影像。該顯示器組件可藉由使用各種機構而被放置並固定在該凹穴內。在一實施例中,該顯示組件係被壓嵌至該凹穴內。該顯示器組件可被設置成與外殼的鄰接部分齊平。以此方式,該顯示器可呈現的視覺內容包括視覺(visual)、靜態影像,以及圖像(icons),譬如可提供資訊給使用者(如,文字、物件、圖形)並接受使用者提供的輸入的圖形使用者界面(GUI)。在一些例子中,被顯示的圖像可被使用者移動至該顯示器上一更為方便的位置。 Although not shown, the display assembly underneath the cover glass 1106 can be used to display images by using any suitable display technology, such as LCD, LED, OLED, electronic or electronic ink, and the like. The display assembly can be placed and secured within the pocket by the use of various mechanisms. In an embodiment, the display assembly is press fit into the pocket. The display assembly can be placed flush with the abutment portion of the housing. In this manner, the visual content that the display can present includes visual, still images, and icons, such as providing information to the user (eg, text, objects, graphics) and accepting input provided by the user. Graphical user interface (GUI). In some examples, the displayed image can be moved by the user to a more convenient location on the display.
在一些實施例中,一顯示器遮罩可被施加至該覆蓋玻璃1106或結 合於該覆蓋玻璃1106內或底下。該顯示器遮罩可被用來強調該顯示器被用來呈現視覺內容的一未被遮蓋的部分且可被用來讓該裝置附著特徵構造108及該固定附著特徵構造110不明顯。該平板裝置1100可包括各式的埠口其可被用來將資訊傳送於該平板裝置1100與外部環境之間。詳言之,資料埠1108可方便資料及電路的傳輸,而揚聲器1110可被用來輸出音訊內容。主頁按鈕(home button)1112可被用來提供輸入訊號,該輸入訊號可被該平板裝置1100內的處理器使用。該處理器可使用來自該主頁按鈕1112的訊號以改變該平板裝置1100的操作狀態。例如,主頁按鈕1112可被用來重設該顯示裝置組件所呈現之目前的頁面。 In some embodiments, a display mask can be applied to the cover glass 1106 or junction It fits within or under the cover glass 1106. The display mask can be used to emphasize that the display is used to present an uncovered portion of the visual content and can be used to make the device attachment feature 108 and the fixed attachment feature 110 unobvious. The tablet device 1100 can include a variety of ports that can be used to communicate information between the tablet device 1100 and an external environment. In particular, the data 埠 1108 facilitates the transmission of data and circuitry, and the speaker 1110 can be used to output audio content. A home button 1112 can be used to provide an input signal that can be used by a processor within the tablet device 1100. The processor can use the signal from the home button 1112 to change the operational state of the tablet device 1100. For example, the home button 1112 can be used to reset the current page presented by the display device component.
在一實施例中,該配件裝置200可以是蓋子組件1200的形式。該蓋子組件1200具有可以添加至該平板裝置1100的整體外觀及質感上之與該平板裝置1100的外觀及質感相匹配的外觀與質感。該蓋子組件1200被示於圖16A及16B中,其以一打開的形態被附著至該平板裝置1100,圖中該覆蓋玻璃1106可被完整地看到。該蓋子組件1200可包括摺片1202。在一實施例中,該摺片1202可具有與覆蓋玻璃1106對應的大小與形狀。該摺片1202可藉由鉸鏈組件(未示出)而被樞軸地連接至該配件附著特徵構造202。介於該附著特徵構造202與該裝置附著特徵構造108之間的磁性附著力可將該蓋子組件1200與該平板裝置1100維持在該摺片1202與該覆蓋玻璃1106面對面的適當的方位及位置。適當方位係指該蓋子組件1200只能以該摺片1202與該覆蓋玻璃1106以匹配嚙合式對準的方式適當地附著至平板裝置1100。該覆蓋玻璃1106與該摺片1202間的匹配嚙合係指當該摺片1202被放置成如圖17A所示與該覆蓋玻璃1106接觸時,該摺片1202實質地覆蓋所有的覆蓋玻璃1106。 In an embodiment, the accessory device 200 can be in the form of a lid assembly 1200. The lid assembly 1200 has an appearance and texture that can be added to the overall appearance and texture of the tablet device 1100 in accordance with the appearance and texture of the tablet device 1100. The lid assembly 1200 is shown in Figures 16A and 16B and is attached to the tablet device 1100 in an open configuration in which the cover glass 1106 can be viewed in its entirety. The lid assembly 1200 can include a flap 1202. In an embodiment, the flap 1202 can have a size and shape corresponding to the cover glass 1106. The flap 1202 can be pivotally coupled to the fitting attachment feature 202 by a hinge assembly (not shown). The magnetic adhesion between the attachment feature 202 and the device attachment feature 108 maintains the lid assembly 1200 and the tablet device 1100 in the proper orientation and position of the flap 1202 that faces the cover glass 1106. Appropriate orientation means that the lid assembly 1200 can only be properly attached to the tablet device 1100 in a mating engagement with the cover glass 1106 with the flap 1202. The mating engagement between the cover glass 1106 and the flap 1202 means that when the flap 1202 is placed in contact with the cover glass 1106 as shown in Figure 17A, the flap 1202 substantially covers all of the cover glass 1106.
圖17A及17B顯示該蓋子組件1200與該平板裝置1100彼此磁性地附著在一起。圖17A顯示該覆蓋玻璃1106完全被該摺片1202覆蓋且與 該摺片1202接觸的閉合形態。該蓋子組件1200可繞著該鉸鏈組件1204從圖17A的閉合狀態樞轉至圖17B的打開狀態。在該閉合形態時,該蓋子組件1200的內層1206可以與該覆蓋玻璃1106接觸。在一實施例中,該內層1206可用能夠被動地清潔該覆蓋玻璃1106的材料來形成。該覆蓋玻璃1106的內層1206的被動式清潔可由該內層1206與該覆蓋玻璃1106接觸的部分的運動來達成。在一特定的實施例中,該內層1206可用一微型纖維材料製成。 17A and 17B show that the lid assembly 1200 and the tablet device 1100 are magnetically attached to each other. Figure 17A shows that the cover glass 1106 is completely covered by the flap 1202 and The closed form in which the flap 1202 contacts. The lid assembly 1200 is pivotable about the hinge assembly 1204 from the closed state of Figure 17A to the open state of Figure 17B. In the closed configuration, the inner layer 1206 of the lid assembly 1200 can be in contact with the cover glass 1106. In an embodiment, the inner layer 1206 can be formed from a material that is capable of passively cleaning the cover glass 1106. Passive cleaning of the inner layer 1206 of the cover glass 1106 can be achieved by movement of the portion of the inner layer 1206 that is in contact with the cover glass 1106. In a particular embodiment, the inner layer 1206 can be formed from a microfiber material.
為了要從該閉合的形態轉變至該打開的形態,釋開力Frelease可被施加至該摺片1202。該釋開力Frelease可克服在該摺片1202內的附著特徵構造216與在該平板裝置1100內的附著特徵構造110之間的磁吸力。因此,蓋子組件1200可被固定至該平板裝置1100直到該Frelease被施加至該摺片1202為止。以此方式,摺片1202可被用來保護該覆蓋玻璃1106。例如,該蓋子組件1200可被磁性地附著至該平板裝置1100。然後摺片1202可被放置在該複蓋玻璃1106上且藉由附著特徵構造110及216間的磁性相互作用而被磁性地固定至該覆蓋玻璃1106。摺片1202可藉由直接對該摺片1202施加該Frelease而從該覆蓋玻璃1106上被拆離。該Frelease可克服附著特徵構造110及216之間的磁吸力。因此,摺片1202可毫無阻礙地從該覆蓋玻璃1106被拆下。 In order to transition from the closed configuration to the open configuration, a release force Frelease can be applied to the flap 1202. The release force F release overcomes the magnetic attraction between the attachment feature 216 within the flap 1202 and the attachment feature 110 within the tablet device 1100. Accordingly, the lid assembly 1200 can be secured to the tablet device 1100 until the F release is applied to the flap 1202. In this manner, flaps 1202 can be used to protect the cover glass 1106. For example, the lid assembly 1200 can be magnetically attached to the tablet device 1100. The flap 1202 can then be placed over the cover glass 1106 and magnetically secured to the cover glass 1106 by magnetic interaction between the attachment features 110 and 216. The flap 1202 can be detached from the cover glass 1106 by applying the F release directly to the flap 1202. The F release overcomes the magnetic attraction between the attachment features 110 and 216. Thus, the flap 1202 can be removed from the cover glass 1106 without hindrance.
為了要在該摺片1202與該附著特徵構造110之間保持良好的磁性附著,該摺片1202可包括數個磁性元件。在該摺片1202中的一些磁性元件可與該附著特徵構造110內對應的磁性元件相互作用。產生在該等磁性元件之間的淨磁吸力強大到足以防止該摺片1202在正常的搬運期間從該覆蓋玻璃1106上意外地鬆脫。然而,該淨磁吸力可被該Frelease克服。 In order to maintain good magnetic attachment between the flap 1202 and the attachment feature formation 110, the flap 1202 can include a plurality of magnetic elements. Some of the magnetic elements in the flap 1202 can interact with corresponding magnetic elements within the attachment feature formation 110. The net magnetic force generated between the magnetic elements is strong enough to prevent the flap 1202 from being accidentally released from the cover glass 1106 during normal handling. However, the net magnetic attraction can be overcome by the F release .
圖18顯示該蓋子組件1200以片段式蓋子組件1300呈現的一特定實施例的頂視圖。該片段式蓋子組件1300可包括本體1302。該本體1302 可具有一對應於該平板裝置1100的覆蓋玻璃1106的尺寸及形狀。該本體1302可用單件式可摺疊的或易曲摺的(pliable)的材料來製造。該本體1302亦可被分割成片段,片段與片段彼此間被一摺疊區分開。以此方式,該等片段可在該等摺疊區處相對於彼此被摺疊。在一實施例中,該本體1302可由多層材料層形成,該等材料層係彼此附著以形成一層疊結構(laminate structure)。每一材料層可以是單一材料件的形式,其具有與該本體1302相符合的大小及形狀。每一材料層亦可具有只對應於該本體1302的一部分的大小及形狀。例如,一與一片段的大小及形狀大致相同的硬質或半硬質材料層可被附著至該片段或以其它方式與該片段相關聯。在另一例子中,一具有與該本體1302的大小及形狀相對應的硬質或半硬質材料層可被用來提供該片段式蓋子組件1300一彈性的基礎。應指出的是,該等材料層每一者都可用具有所想要的特性的材料來形成。例如,該片段式蓋子組件1300的一與易碎的表面(譬如,玻璃)接觸的層可用不會損傷或以其它方式傷害該易碎的表面的軟質材料來形成。在另一實施例中,一像是微型纖維的材料可被使用,其可被動地清潔該易碎的表面。在另一方面,一外露於外部環境中的材料層可用更粗糙且更耐用的材料,譬如像是塑膠或皮革,形成。 FIG. 18 shows a top view of a particular embodiment of the lid assembly 1200 presented in a segmented lid assembly 1300. The segmented lid assembly 1300 can include a body 1302. The body 1302 There may be a size and shape of the cover glass 1106 corresponding to the tablet device 1100. The body 1302 can be fabricated from a single piece of foldable or pliable material. The body 1302 can also be segmented into segments, the segments and segments being separated from one another by a fold. In this way, the segments can be folded relative to one another at the fold regions. In one embodiment, the body 1302 can be formed from a plurality of layers of material that are attached to each other to form a laminate structure. Each layer of material may be in the form of a single piece of material having a size and shape that conforms to the body 1302. Each material layer may also have a size and shape that corresponds only to a portion of the body 1302. For example, a layer of hard or semi-rigid material that is substantially the same size and shape as a segment can be attached to or otherwise associated with the segment. In another example, a layer of hard or semi-rigid material having a size and shape corresponding to the body 1302 can be used to provide a resilient base for the segmented lid assembly 1300. It should be noted that each of these layers of material may be formed from a material having the desired characteristics. For example, a layer of the segmented lid assembly 1300 that contacts a frangible surface (e.g., glass) can be formed from a soft material that does not damage or otherwise damage the frangible surface. In another embodiment, a material such as microfibers can be used that passively cleans the frangible surface. On the other hand, a layer of material exposed to the external environment can be formed from a coarser and more durable material such as plastic or leather.
在一特定的實施例中,該片段式本體1302可被分割成數個片段1304-1310,其被薄且可摺疊的部分1312隔開。該等片段1304-1310的每一者可包括一或多個設置於其內的插入件。舉例而言,該等片段可包括一袋形區,該等片段可被設置於該等袋形區內或者該等插入件可被埋設在該等片段內(如,插入件模製)。如果是使用袋形區的話,則該袋形區可具有能夠容納對應的插入件的大小及形狀。該等插入件可具有各式形狀,但最典型的是被作成與該片段式本體1302的整體外觀相符的形狀(如,矩形)。該等插入件可被用來提供結構支撐給該片段 式本體1302。亦即,該等插入件可提供剛性給該蓋子組件。在一些例子中,該等插入件可被稱為加強件。因此,該蓋子組件是相對堅硬的,但沿著該等摺疊區的部份除外,該等摺疊區是較薄的且沒有包括該等插入件(以容許摺疊),讓該片段式蓋子組件1300更耐用及更容易操作。在一實施例中,片段1304,1306,及1310相對於片段1308在尺寸上的比例可以是約0.72比1,這表示片段1304,1306及1310的寬度約為片段1308的寬度的72%。以此方式,一預有適當角度的三角形可被形成(即,用於顯示器座的約75°及用於鍵盤座的約11°,這將於下文中討論)。 In a particular embodiment, the segmented body 1302 can be segmented into a plurality of segments 1304-1310 that are separated by a thin, foldable portion 1312. Each of the segments 1304-1310 can include one or more inserts disposed therein. For example, the segments can include a pocket-shaped region that can be disposed within the pocket regions or the inserts can be embedded within the segments (eg, insert molding). If a pocket is used, the pocket can have a size and shape that can accommodate a corresponding insert. The inserts can have a variety of shapes, but are most typically shaped to conform to the overall appearance of the segmented body 1302 (e.g., rectangular). The inserts can be used to provide structural support to the segment Body 1302. That is, the inserts provide rigidity to the lid assembly. In some examples, the inserts may be referred to as stiffeners. Thus, the lid assembly is relatively rigid, except for portions along the fold regions that are relatively thin and do not include the inserts (to allow for folding), allowing the segmented lid assembly 1300 More durable and easier to operate. In one embodiment, the ratio of the segments 1304, 1306, and 1310 relative to the segment 1308 may be about 0.72 to 1, indicating that the width of the segments 1304, 1306, and 1310 is about 72% of the width of the segment 1308. In this manner, a pre-angled triangle can be formed (i.e., about 75° for the display stand and about 11° for the keyboard stand, as discussed below).
片段1306,1308,及1310可分別包括插入件1314,1316,及1318(以虛線形式顯示)。插入件1314-1318可用硬質的材料或可增加本體1302的彈性的半硬質的材料來形成。可被使用的材料的例子包括塑膠、玻璃纖維、碳纖維組成物、金屬、及類此者。片段1304可包括插入件1320其亦是用彈性材料(譬如,塑膠)製成但被設置來容納該等磁性元件1322,該等磁性元件的一部分可與該平板裝置1100內的磁性元件,更明確地為附著特徵構造110,相互作用。 Segments 1306, 1308, and 1310 can include inserts 1314, 1316, and 1318, respectively (shown in dashed lines). The inserts 1314-1318 can be formed from a hard material or a semi-rigid material that increases the elasticity of the body 1302. Examples of materials that can be used include plastics, fiberglass, carbon fiber compositions, metals, and the like. The segment 1304 can include an insert 1320 that is also made of an elastomeric material (eg, plastic) but is configured to receive the magnetic elements 1322, a portion of which can be more clearly defined with the magnetic elements within the tablet device 1100. The ground is an attachment feature 110 that interacts.
因為該片段式本體1302能夠摺疊的能力,更明確地是該等不同的片段可相對於彼此摺疊的能力,所以大多數的磁性元件1322可被用來與埋設在插入件1318內的磁性作用插入件1324磁性地相互作用。藉由將該作用插入件1324與該等磁性元件1322磁性地結合起來,不同的支撐結構可被形成,這些支撐結構的一部分的形狀可以是三角形。該等三角形支撐結構在該平板裝置1100的使用時可發揮輔助作用。例如,一三角形支撐結構可被用來以一種視覺內容可用與水平夾約75°之所想要的視角呈現的方式來支撐該平板裝置1100。然而,為了要能夠適當地摺疊該片段式蓋子1300,該片段1308可被作成比片段1304、1306及1310(它們大小大致相同)稍大的大小。以此方式,該等片段可形成 一具有兩個等邊及一較長的第三邊的三角形,該三角形具有一約75°的內角。 Because of the ability of the segmented body 1302 to be folded, more specifically the ability of the different segments to fold relative to one another, most of the magnetic elements 1322 can be used to intervene with magnetic interactions embedded within the insert 1318. Pieces 1324 magnetically interact. By magnetically bonding the active insert 1324 to the magnetic elements 1322, different support structures can be formed, a portion of which can be triangular in shape. The triangular support structures can play an auxiliary role in the use of the tablet device 1100. For example, a triangular support structure can be used to support the tablet device 1100 in a manner that visual content can be presented at a desired viewing angle of about 75[deg.] horizontally. However, in order to be able to properly fold the segmented cover 1300, the segment 1308 can be made slightly larger than the segments 1304, 1306, and 1310 (which are approximately the same size). In this way, the fragments can be formed A triangle having two equilateral sides and a longer third side, the triangle having an internal angle of about 75°.
形成至少一三角形支撐結構的方法可包括片段1304,其以一種埋設在插入件1320內的大多數磁性元件1322磁性地吸引該磁性作用的插入件1324的方式相對於片段1306-1310摺疊。以此方式,片段1304及片段1310可被磁性地結合在一起以形成一具有適當的尺度之三角形支撐結構。該三角形支撐結構可被用作為一台座,該平板裝置1100可被放置於其上致使視覺內容可以約75°的角度被呈現。在另一例子中,該片段式蓋子1300可被摺疊以形成一可被用作為鍵盤支撐件的三角形支撐結構。該片段式蓋子1300亦可被摺疊以形成一可被用來將該平板裝置1100吊掛於一水平支撐物(譬如,天花板)或一垂直支撐物(譬如,牆壁)上的三角形支撐結構。 The method of forming at least one triangular support structure can include a segment 1304 that is folded relative to the segments 1306-1310 in a manner that most of the magnetic elements 1322 embedded within the insert 1320 magnetically attract the magnetically acting insert 1324. In this manner, segment 1304 and segment 1310 can be magnetically bonded together to form a triangular support structure of appropriate dimensions. The triangular support structure can be used as a pedestal on which the tablet device 1100 can be placed such that visual content can be presented at an angle of about 75°. In another example, the segmented cover 1300 can be folded to form a triangular support structure that can be used as a keyboard support. The segmented cover 1300 can also be folded to form a triangular support structure that can be used to hang the tablet device 1100 on a horizontal support (such as a ceiling) or a vertical support (such as a wall).
該蓋子組件1300可藉由一鉸鏈組件而樞軸地附著至配件附著特徵構造202。該鉸鏈組件可提供一或多個樞銷用以在該蓋子組件透過磁鐵被附著至該裝置的同時允許該蓋子摺疊於該蓋子上。在所示的實施例中,該鉸鏈組件可包括第一鉸鏈部分(亦被稱為第一端凸部)1328及一被設置成與該第一端凸部相反的第二鉸鏈部分(或第二端凸部)1330。該第一端凸部1328可藉由一被包含在該片段式本體1302的管子部分內的連接桿1332(以虛線形式顯示)而被剛性地連接至第二端凸部1330。該連接桿1332的縱軸線可如一樞轉軸線1333般地作用,該片段式本體可繞著該縱軸線相對於該鉸鏈組件樞轉。該連接桿1332可用強壯的足以剛性地支撐該蓋子組件1300以及任何磁性地附著至該磁性附著構造202的物件,譬如該平板裝置1100,的金屬或塑膠來製造。 The lid assembly 1300 can be pivotally attached to the accessory attachment feature formation 202 by a hinge assembly. The hinge assembly can provide one or more pivot pins for allowing the cover to be folded over the cover while the cover assembly is attached to the device through the magnet. In the illustrated embodiment, the hinge assembly can include a first hinge portion (also referred to as a first end projection) 1328 and a second hinge portion disposed opposite the first end projection (or Two-end convex part) 1330. The first end projection 1328 can be rigidly coupled to the second end projection 1330 by a connecting rod 1332 (shown in phantom) contained within the tube portion of the segment body 1302. The longitudinal axis of the connecting rod 1332 can function as a pivot axis 1333 about which the segment body can pivot relative to the hinge assembly. The connecting rod 1332 can be fabricated from a metal or plastic that is strong enough to rigidly support the lid assembly 1300 and any articles that are magnetically attached to the magnetic attachment formation 202, such as the flat panel device 1100.
為了要防止金屬與金屬接觸,該第一端凸部1328及第二端凸部1330每一者可分別具有保護層1336及1338附著於其上。保護層(亦被稱為緩衝件)1336及1338可防止第一端凸部1328及第二端凸部1330與 該外殼1102直接接觸。這在第一端凸部1328及第二端凸部1330與該外殼1102都是用金屬製造時是特別重要。緩衝件1336及1338的存在可防止端凸部與外殼1102之間屬與金屬的接觸,藉以消除在接觸點實質磨損及撕裂(這會降低該平板裝置1100的整體外觀與質感)的機會。 In order to prevent metal from contacting the metal, the first end projection 1328 and the second end projection 1330 may each have a protective layer 1336 and 1338 attached thereto. Protective layers (also referred to as bumpers) 1336 and 1338 prevent first end projections 1328 and second end projections 1330 from The outer casing 1102 is in direct contact. This is particularly important when both the first end projection 1328 and the second end projection 1330 and the outer casing 1102 are made of metal. The presence of the cushioning members 1336 and 1338 prevents metal-to-metal contact between the end projections and the outer casing 1102, thereby eliminating the opportunity for substantial wear and tear at the contact points, which reduces the overall appearance and texture of the tablet device 1100.
為了要保持它們的保護品質,緩衝件1336及1338可用彈性的、耐用的且可防止該平板裝置1100的外表面的損傷的材料來製造。這特別重要,因為良好的磁性附著需要的公差很緊且在該平板裝置1100的使用壽命期間預期的附著循環的次數很大。因此,緩衝件1336及1338可用軟質塑膠、布料或紙來製造,其可藉由使用任何適合的黏劑而被附著至該等端凸部上。應指出的是,該等緩衝件在有需要時可被去除並用新的緩衝件來替換。 In order to maintain their protective qualities, the cushioning members 1336 and 1338 may be fabricated from a resilient, durable material that prevents damage to the outer surface of the tablet device 1100. This is particularly important because the tolerances required for good magnetic attachment are tight and the number of attachment cycles expected during the life of the tablet device 1100 is large. Thus, cushioning members 1336 and 1338 can be fabricated from soft plastic, cloth or paper that can be attached to the end projections using any suitable adhesive. It should be noted that the cushioning members can be removed and replaced with new cushioning members when needed.
該第一端凸部1328及第二端凸部1330可藉由鉸鏈跨距件1340而被磁性地連接至該電子裝置,該鉸鏈跨距件1340被建構來相對於該等端凸部樞轉。該樞轉可使用鉸鏈支柱1342(它的一部分可被露出來)來達成。鉸鏈支柱1342可將該鉸鏈跨距件1340可轉動地固定至第一端凸部1328及第二端凸部1330。鉸鏈跨距件1340可包括磁性元件。該等磁性元件可被配置來將該鉸鏈跨距件1340磁性地附著至一磁性附著特徵構造,該磁性附著特徵構造具有該電子裝置內的磁性元件的匹配配置。為了要將將該等磁性元件固定在該鉸鏈跨距件1340內的定位上,該等鉸鏈支柱1342可被用來將位於該鉸鏈跨距件1340兩端的磁性元件予以固定,降低該鉸鏈跨距件1340內的磁性元件四處移動而擾亂該鉸鏈跨距件1340與該電子裝置內的磁性附著特徵構造間的磁性附著的可能性。 The first end projection 1328 and the second end projection 1330 can be magnetically coupled to the electronic device by a hinge span 1340, the hinge span 1340 being configured to pivot relative to the equipotential projections . This pivoting can be achieved using hinge struts 1342 (a portion of which can be exposed). The hinge strut 1342 can rotatably secure the hinge span 1340 to the first end projection 1328 and the second end projection 1330. The hinge span 1340 can include a magnetic element. The magnetic elements can be configured to magnetically attach the hinge span 1340 to a magnetic attachment feature configuration having a mating configuration of magnetic elements within the electronic device. In order to secure the magnetic elements in position within the hinge span 1340, the hinge struts 1342 can be used to secure magnetic elements located at opposite ends of the hinge span 1340, reducing the hinge span The magnetic elements within the piece 1340 move around to disturb the possibility of magnetic attachment between the hinge span 1340 and the magnetic attachment features within the electronic device.
為了要確保在該鉸鏈跨距件1340內的磁性元件與該電子裝置內的對應磁性元件之間沒有干擾,該鉸鏈跨距件1340可用非磁性作用的材料,譬如塑膠,或非磁金屬,譬如鋁,來製造。當該鉸鏈跨距件1340 是用非磁性作用的金屬,譬如像是鋁,來製造時,該鉸鏈跨距件1340與該電子裝置1100的外殼1102之間的金屬對金屬的接觸可藉由使用該保護層1344來加以防止。當該鉸鏈跨距件1340及該電子裝置1100彼此磁性地附著時,保護層1344可被施用在該鉸鏈跨距件1340面向該外殼1102的表面上。該保護層1344(亦被稱為標籤1344)可用許多不會損傷該外殼1102的表面的材料來製造。這些材料可包括,例如,紙、布料、塑膠等等。 In order to ensure that there is no interference between the magnetic elements within the hinge span 1340 and corresponding magnetic elements within the electronic device, the hinge span 1340 can be made of a non-magnetic material, such as a plastic, or a non-magnetic metal, such as Aluminum, to manufacture. When the hinge span 1340 Metal-to-metal contact between the hinge span 1340 and the outer casing 1102 of the electronic device 1100 can be prevented by using the protective layer 1344 when fabricated from a non-magnetic metal such as aluminum. . When the hinge span 1340 and the electronic device 1100 are magnetically attached to each other, the protective layer 1344 can be applied on the surface of the hinge span 1340 facing the outer casing 1102. The protective layer 1344 (also referred to as the label 1344) can be fabricated from a number of materials that do not damage the surface of the outer casing 1102. These materials may include, for example, paper, cloth, plastic, and the like.
圖19A及19B顯示該鉸鏈跨距件1340的兩個實施例的細部。詳言之,圖19A顯示鉸鏈跨距件的實施例1400,其中磁性鈍態的間隔件被用來分隔及固定該等磁性元件。詳言之,該鉸鏈跨距件1400可包圍並支撐磁性元件1402,該等磁性元件1402被磁性附著特徵構造202用來將該片段式蓋子組件1300磁性地附著至該平板裝置1100。該等磁性元件1402可被配置成一特定的組態,其與該平板裝置1100的該裝置附著特徵構造108內的對應磁性元件相匹配。以此方式,該片段式蓋子組件1300及該平板裝置1100可精準地且可重複地彼此附著。 19A and 19B show details of two embodiments of the hinge span 1340. In particular, Figure 19A shows an embodiment 1400 of a hinge span wherein a magnetically passive spacer is used to separate and secure the magnetic elements. In particular, the hinge span 1400 can enclose and support the magnetic element 1402 that is used by the magnetic attachment feature 202 to magnetically attach the segmented cover assembly 1300 to the tablet device 1100. The magnetic elements 1402 can be configured in a particular configuration that matches the corresponding magnetic elements within the device attachment feature 108 of the tablet device 1100. In this manner, the segmented lid assembly 1300 and the tablet device 1100 can be attached to each other accurately and reproducibly.
為了要在一段長的時間期間內保持可重複且穩定的磁性嚙合,該等磁性元件1402可保持在穩定的組態。換言之,在該鉸鏈跨距件1400內的該等磁性元件1402應相對於在該平板裝置1100的磁性附著系統中的對應的磁性元件保持在它們的相對位置及磁極一段長的時間。這在該蓋子組件1300及/或該平板裝置1100的預計使用壽命期間預期會有重複的附著循環時是特別重要的。 In order to maintain a repeatable and stable magnetic engagement for a long period of time, the magnetic elements 1402 can be maintained in a stable configuration. In other words, the magnetic elements 1402 within the hinge span 1400 should remain in their relative positions and poles for a prolonged period of time relative to corresponding magnetic elements in the magnetic attachment system of the tablet device 1100. This is particularly important when a repeated attachment cycle is expected during the expected life of the lid assembly 1300 and/or the plate assembly 1100.
在此處,為了確保在許多附著循環的整個過程中磁性嚙合的完整性,該等磁性元件1402的組態可保持著相對於彼此及相對於裝置附著特徵構造108內的對應磁性元件被實質地固定。因此,為了要確保該等磁性元件1402的實體佈局保持實質固定不動,填充材料1404可被插入到該鉸鏈跨距件1400內不同的磁性元件1402之間。填充材料1404可 以是非磁性材料譬如塑膠。該填充材料1404可被作成能夠嵌設於磁性元件間的間隙空間內的形狀。以此方式,磁性元件1402可保持在一固定且穩定的組態一段很長的時間。 Here, to ensure the integrity of the magnetic engagement throughout the many attachment cycles, the configuration of the magnetic elements 1402 can remain substantially relative to each other and to the corresponding magnetic elements within the device attachment feature configuration 108. fixed. Accordingly, in order to ensure that the physical layout of the magnetic elements 1402 remains substantially stationary, the filler material 1404 can be inserted between the different magnetic elements 1402 within the hinge span 1400. Filling material 1404 can It is a non-magnetic material such as plastic. The filling material 1404 can be formed into a shape that can be embedded in a gap space between the magnetic elements. In this manner, the magnetic element 1402 can be maintained in a fixed and stable configuration for a long period of time.
在另一方面,圖19B顯示該鉸鏈跨距件1340以鉸鏈跨距件1410形式呈現的另一實施例,其利用實體相鄰的磁性元件之間相互的磁吸力來將該等磁性元件固定於定位上。以此方式,構成部件的數量可減少。再者,因為該等磁性元件1402所佔的面積減少,所以對應的磁通量密度可提高。然而,端塞1412可被用來將位在鉸鏈跨距件1410的兩端的磁性元件固定。當位在該鉸鏈跨距件1410兩端的磁性元件具有對準的磁極時,必需使用端塞1412來克服淨磁互斥力。除了端塞1412之外,另一實施例可提供設於中心的間隔件1414。該設在中心的間隔件1414可用磁性鈍態材料製造且可被用來將該等磁性元件1402固定在定位。 In another aspect, Figure 19B shows another embodiment in which the hinge span 1340 is presented in the form of a hinge span 1410 that utilizes mutual magnetic attraction between physically adjacent magnetic elements to secure the magnetic components to Positioning. In this way, the number of constituent parts can be reduced. Furthermore, since the area occupied by the magnetic elements 1402 is reduced, the corresponding magnetic flux density can be improved. However, the end plug 1412 can be used to secure the magnetic elements positioned at the ends of the hinge span 1410. When the magnetic elements positioned at the ends of the hinge span 1410 have aligned poles, the end plugs 1412 must be used to overcome the net magnetic mutual repulsion. In addition to the end plug 1412, another embodiment can provide a centrally disposed spacer 1414. The centrally disposed spacer 1414 can be fabricated from a magnetically passive material and can be used to secure the magnetic elements 1402 in position.
圖19C顯示當該片段式蓋子組件1300被磁性地附著至該平板裝置1100時,該鉸鏈跨距件1340形成該嚙合表面的一部分的部分。詳言之,標籤1344被顯示為藉由使用黏劑(如,黏膠)而附著至該鉸鏈跨距件1340。應指出的是,該標籤1344被設置成符合(conform)該外殼1102之形成該嚙合表面的一部分的部分的形狀。以此方式,相對應的磁性元件間的分開距離可被最小化。 Figure 19C shows that when the segmented lid assembly 1300 is magnetically attached to the tablet device 1100, the hinge span 1340 forms a portion of the engagement surface. In particular, the label 1344 is shown attached to the hinge span 1340 by the use of an adhesive (eg, glue). It should be noted that the label 1344 is configured to conform to the shape of the portion of the outer casing 1102 that forms a portion of the engagement surface. In this way, the separation distance between the corresponding magnetic elements can be minimized.
圖20A顯示磁性地附著至該平板裝置1100的片段式蓋子組件1300的代表性側視圖。圖20B顯示沿著圖18的線A-A所取之該片段式蓋子組件1300/平板裝置1100的代表性剖面圖。圖20B顯示被覆蓋的形態及圖20C顯示被向後摺的形態,其將該平板裝置1100的保護層1106完全露出來。 FIG. 20A shows a representative side view of a segmented lid assembly 1300 magnetically attached to the tablet device 1100. Figure 20B shows a representative cross-sectional view of the segmented lid assembly 1300/plate device 1100 taken along line A-A of Figure 18. FIG. 20B shows a covered form and FIG. 20C shows a form folded back, which completely exposes the protective layer 1106 of the tablet device 1100.
圖21A顯示該磁性地附著至該具有彎曲形狀的外殼1102的該鉸鏈跨距件1340的剖面側視圖1500。在此實施例中,外殼1102可具有一彎 曲的形狀且是用非磁性材料(譬如,鋁)來製造。磁性元件1502可被包含於該平板裝置1100的裝置附著特徵構造108內。在一些實施例中,為了要防止金屬與金屬接觸,在該磁性元件1502是金屬的實施例中,一保護膜可被附著至該磁性元件1502的一嚙合表面,其可防止磁性元件1502與該外殼1102直接接觸。當考量對應的磁性元件間的磁性嚙合力時,該保護膜可薄到足以被忽略。如果該磁性元件1502不是金屬製成的或如果該外殼1102與該磁性元件1502接觸的部分不是金屬話,則該保護膜可以是非必要的。 21A shows a cross-sectional side view 1500 of the hinge span 1340 magnetically attached to the outer casing 1102 having a curved shape. In this embodiment, the housing 1102 can have a bend The shape of the curve is made of a non-magnetic material such as aluminum. Magnetic element 1502 can be included within device attachment feature configuration 108 of tablet device 1100. In some embodiments, in order to prevent metal from metal contact, in embodiments where the magnetic element 1502 is metal, a protective film can be attached to an engagement surface of the magnetic element 1502 that prevents the magnetic element 1502 from The outer casing 1102 is in direct contact. When considering the magnetic meshing force between the corresponding magnetic elements, the protective film can be thin enough to be ignored. If the magnetic element 1502 is not made of metal or if the portion of the outer casing 1102 that is in contact with the magnetic element 1502 is not metallic, the protective film may be unnecessary.
磁性元件1502可與該鉸鏈跨距件1340內的對應磁性元件1504磁性地相互作用。磁性元件1504可具有約2mm的厚度。該磁性相互作用可產生滿足式(3a)的淨磁吸力FNET,其中該分開距離xsep約等於該外殼1102的厚度t與該標籤1344的厚度“l”的總和。該厚度“l”可以是約0.2mm。因此,為了要將該分開距離xsep最小化(及藉以提高該FNET),磁性元件1502可被作成符合該外殼1102的內表面1506的形狀。又,該標籤1344及該磁性元件1504每一者都可被作成符合該外殼1102的外表面1508的形狀。以此方式,介於該磁性元件1502與該磁性元件1504之間的距離可被減小至約該外殼1102的厚度t及該標籤1344的厚度l。 Magnetic element 1502 can magnetically interact with corresponding magnetic element 1504 within the hinge span 1340. Magnetic element 1504 can have a thickness of about 2 mm. The magnetic interaction can produce a net magnetic attraction F NET that satisfies equation (3a), wherein the separation distance x sep is approximately equal to the sum of the thickness t of the outer casing 1102 and the thickness " l " of the label 1344. The thickness "l" may be about 0.2 mm. Therefore, in order to minimize the separation distance x sep (and thereby increase the F NET ), the magnetic element 1502 can be made to conform to the shape of the inner surface 1506 of the outer casing 1102. Moreover, the label 1344 and the magnetic element 1504 can each be shaped to conform to the outer surface 1508 of the outer casing 1102. In this manner, the distance between the magnetic element 1502 and the magnetic element 1504 can be reduced to about the thickness t of the outer casing 1102 and the thickness l of the label 1344.
為了要進一步改良介於磁性元件1502及1504間的淨磁吸力FNET,分磁器(magnetic shunt)1510可被膠黏至該磁性元件1504之遠離該外殼1102的部分並包圍該部分。分磁器1510可用磁活性材料(譬如,鋼或鐵)來製造。該磁活性材料可將原本被導向遠離磁性元件1502的磁通量線重新導向該外殼1102,藉以提高介於該磁性元件1502與磁性元件1504間的總磁通量密度BTOTAL,造成淨磁吸力FNET有相對應的增加。該分磁器1510接著被膠黏至該鉸鏈跨距件1340的外殼1512。應指出的是,為了要確保只有標籤1344接觸外殼1102的外表面1508(以避免金屬與金屬的接觸),該標籤1344突出(即,突伸出)該鉸鏈跨距件1340的 外殼1512約“d”的距離。名義上地,距離d可以是約0.1mm。 In order to further improve the net magnetic attraction F NET between the magnetic elements 1502 and 1504, a magnetic shunt 1510 can be glued to the portion of the magnetic element 1504 remote from the outer casing 1102 and surrounding the portion. The magnetizer 1510 can be fabricated from a magnetically active material such as steel or iron. The magnetically active material redirects the magnetic flux line originally directed away from the magnetic element 1502 to the outer casing 1102, thereby increasing the total magnetic flux density B TOTAL between the magnetic element 1502 and the magnetic element 1504, resulting in a net magnetic attraction force F NET having a phase Corresponding increase. The magnetizer 1510 is then glued to the outer casing 1512 of the hinge span 1340. It should be noted that in order to ensure that only the label 1344 contacts the outer surface 1508 of the outer casing 1102 (to avoid metal-to-metal contact), the label 1344 protrudes (ie, protrudes) from the outer casing 1512 of the hinge span 1340. The distance of d "". Nominally, the distance d can be about 0.1 mm.
因為該淨磁吸力FNET與合作的磁性元件間的分開距離部分地相關,所以在該平板裝置1100的磁性附著系統與該鉸鏈跨距件1340內的磁性元件間的整體完整性會受到合作的磁性元件間的實際分開距離以及沿著該鉸鏈跨距件1340的長度L的分開距離的一致性的影響。為了要沿著該鉸鏈跨距件1340提供高度相關聯的磁吸力,該鉸鏈跨距件1340內的磁性元件與在該平板裝置1100內的磁性附著系統的磁性元件間的分開距離被良好的控制。 Because the net magnetic attraction F NET is partially related to the separation distance between the cooperating magnetic elements, the overall integrity between the magnetic attachment system of the tablet device 1100 and the magnetic components within the hinge span 1340 will be cooperative. The effect of the actual separation distance between the magnetic elements and the separation distance along the length L of the hinge span 1340. In order to provide a highly correlated magnetic attraction along the hinge span 1340, the separation distance between the magnetic elements within the hinge span 1340 and the magnetic elements of the magnetic attachment system within the tablet 1100 is well controlled. .
圖21B顯示磁性地附著至具有平的表面的外殼1102的該鉸鏈跨距件1340的剖面圖1550。在此配置中,該標籤1344及磁鐵1554每一者都符合該外殼1102的平的形狀。 21B shows a cross-sectional view 1550 of the hinge span 1340 magnetically attached to the outer casing 1102 having a flat surface. In this configuration, the label 1344 and the magnet 1554 each conform to the flat shape of the outer casing 1102.
為了要確保該淨磁吸力沿著該鉸鏈跨距件1340的長度的一致性,該鉸鏈跨距件1340的構件可使用固定件(fixture)1600來組裝,如圖22A的剖面圖及圖22B的立體圖所示。固定件1600可具有符合該外殼1102的外表面的形狀的表面1602。為了要將該鉸鏈跨距件1340以一種可確保沿著該鉸鏈跨距件1340的長度L有一致的磁吸力的方式組裝(以及為了要提供美學上令人愉悅的外觀),該標籤1344被暫時地附著至該固定件1600的表面1602上。因為該表面1602實質地伏合該外表面1508的行狀,所以標籤1344將具有一同樣符合該外表面1508的形狀的形狀。在一實施例中,該固定件1600內可被產生部分真空,這可讓該標籤1344在抽吸力下附著至表面1602。以此方式,該被組裝的鉸鏈跨距件可藉由去除該部分真空而從該表面1602被取下。 In order to ensure uniformity of the net magnetic attraction along the length of the hinge span 1340, the members of the hinge span 1340 can be assembled using a fixture 1600, as in the cross-sectional view of Figure 22A and Figure 22B. The perspective view is shown. The fixture 1600 can have a surface 1602 that conforms to the shape of the outer surface of the outer casing 1102. In order to assemble the hinge span 1340 in a manner that ensures a consistent magnetic attraction along the length L of the hinge span 1340 (and to provide an aesthetically pleasing appearance), the label 1344 is Temporarily attached to the surface 1602 of the fixture 1600. Because the surface 1602 substantially converges the row of the outer surface 1508, the label 1344 will have a shape that also conforms to the shape of the outer surface 1508. In an embodiment, a partial vacuum can be created within the fixture 1600, which allows the label 1344 to adhere to the surface 1602 under suction. In this manner, the assembled hinge span can be removed from the surface 1602 by removing the partial vacuum.
一但該標籤1344被固定至該固定件1600的表面1602,磁性元件1504可藉由使用任何適當的黏劑而被設置成與該標籤1344直接接觸並附著至該標籤1344。為了要儘可能地減小該分開距離,磁性元件1504可具有一符合該標籤1344與該表面1602兩者的形狀。以此方式,符合 該標籤1344與該磁性元件1504兩者的形狀可確保磁性元件1506與1502之間的分開距離是最小的。磁性元件1504然後可被膠黏至該由磁活性材料(譬如,鋼)製成的分磁器1510,用以將磁通量朝向磁性元件1502聚集。分磁器1510然後可被該鉸鏈跨距件的外殼1512封包並膠黏至該外殼1512,留下約d=0.1mm的標籤1344從該外殼1512突伸出。 Once the label 1344 is secured to the surface 1602 of the fastener 1600, the magnetic element 1504 can be placed in direct contact with and attached to the label 1344 by using any suitable adhesive. In order to reduce the separation distance as much as possible, the magnetic element 1504 can have a shape that conforms to both the label 1344 and the surface 1602. In this way, in accordance with The shape of both the label 1344 and the magnetic element 1504 ensures that the separation distance between the magnetic elements 1506 and 1502 is minimal. The magnetic element 1504 can then be glued to the magnetizer 1510 made of a magnetically active material (e.g., steel) for focusing the magnetic flux toward the magnetic element 1502. The splitter 1510 can then be encapsulated and glued to the outer casing 1512 of the hinge span member, leaving a tab 1344 of about d = 0.1 mm protruding from the outer casing 1512.
除了提供該平板裝置1100保護之外,該片段式蓋子組件1300可被操作以形成有用的支撐結構。因此,圖23至26顯示該蓋子組件1300依據被描述的實施例之有用的配置。 In addition to providing protection for the tablet device 1100, the segmented lid assembly 1300 can be operated to form a useful support structure. Thus, Figures 23 through 26 show a useful configuration of the lid assembly 1300 in accordance with the described embodiment.
例如,如圖23所示,該片段式蓋子組件1300可被摺疊使得該插入件1324的磁性作用部分與磁性元件1322磁性地相互作用。應指出的是,用來保持三角支撐結構1700的磁力約在5至10牛頓(NT)的範圍之間。以此方式,該三角支撐結構1700可被防止意外地展開。該三角支撐結構1700可被形成為能夠以許多方式被用來撐高該平板裝置1100。例如,該三角支撐結構1700可被用來以一種符合人體工學的角度相對於一支撐表面放置觸控表面1702的方式支撐該平板裝置1100。以此方式,使用者使用該觸控表面1702將會是一友善的經驗。這在長期使用該觸控表面的情況中特別顯著。例如,一虛擬鍵盤可可被呈現在該觸控表面1702上。該虛擬鍵盤可被用來輸入資料至該平板裝置1100。藉由使用該三角支撐結構1700來將該平板裝置1100支撐在一符合人體工學的角度,重複運動的有害影響可被降低或甚至是被消除。 For example, as shown in FIG. 23, the segmented lid assembly 1300 can be folded such that the magnetically active portion of the insert 1324 magnetically interacts with the magnetic element 1322. It should be noted that the magnetic force used to maintain the triangular support structure 1700 is between about 5 and 10 Newtons (NT). In this way, the triangular support structure 1700 can be prevented from unintentionally unfolding. The triangular support structure 1700 can be formed to be capable of supporting the tablet device 1100 in a number of ways. For example, the triangular support structure 1700 can be used to support the tablet device 1100 in a manner that places the touch surface 1702 relative to a support surface at an ergonomic angle. In this way, the user's use of the touch surface 1702 would be a friendly experience. This is particularly remarkable in the case of using the touch surface for a long time. For example, a virtual keyboard cocoa is presented on the touch surface 1702. The virtual keyboard can be used to input data to the tablet device 1100. By using the triangular support structure 1700 to support the tablet device 1100 at an ergonomic angle, the deleterious effects of repeated motion can be reduced or even eliminated.
圖24A及24B顯示該片段式蓋子組件1300的另一摺疊操作,其中該三角支撐結構1700可被用來將該平板裝置1100支撐在一觀看狀態。觀看狀態係指視覺內容(視覺、靜態照片、卡通片等等)可以與水平成75°角之適合觀看者的角度來呈現。在此“支架(kickstand)”狀態中,視覺內容可用易於觀看的角度來呈現。該平板裝置1100的可觀看區域可用約75°的角度來呈現,該角度是在能夠產生良好觀看經驗的最佳觀 看角度範圍內。 24A and 24B show another folding operation of the segmented lid assembly 1300, wherein the triangular support structure 1700 can be used to support the tablet device 1100 in a viewing state. Viewing state means that visual content (visual, still photos, cartoons, etc.) can be presented at an angle suitable for the viewer at a 75[deg.] angle to the horizontal. In this "kickstand" state, visual content can be presented in an easy to view angle. The viewable area of the tablet device 1100 can be presented at an angle of about 75°, which is the best view at which good viewing experience can be produced. Look at the angle range.
圖25A及25B顯示該片段式蓋子組件1300被摺疊成不同的懸掛實施例。懸掛實施例指的是,藉由將該片段式蓋子組件1300摺疊成適當的三角形,該平板裝置1100可如圖26A所示地從上方予以懸掛成一吊具1900的形式。該吊具1900可被用來從上方懸掛該平板裝置1100。例如,該吊具1900可藉由使用一支撐物(譬如,一桿)而被直接懸掛在天花板上。該吊具1900可藉由單純地將該片段式蓋子組件1300摺疊於第一方向上直到該等埋設的磁鐵1322磁性地嚙合該用鋼或鐵製成的磁性作用的插入件1324為止來產生。該等埋設的磁鐵1322與該磁性作用的插入件1324嚙合所產生的磁性電路可提供將該平板裝置1100安全地懸掛於任何水平地對準的支撐結構所需之足夠的支撐。 Figures 25A and 25B show the segmented lid assembly 1300 being folded into different suspension embodiments. The suspension embodiment means that by folding the segmented lid assembly 1300 into a suitable triangle, the tablet device 1100 can be suspended from above into the form of a spreader 1900 as shown in Fig. 26A. The spreader 1900 can be used to suspend the tablet device 1100 from above. For example, the spreader 1900 can be suspended directly from the ceiling by using a support (e.g., a rod). The spreader 1900 can be created by simply folding the segmented lid assembly 1300 in a first direction until the embedded magnets 1322 magnetically engage the magnetically acting inserts 1324 made of steel or iron. The magnetic circuitry created by the engagement of the embedded magnets 1322 with the magnetically acting inserts 1324 can provide sufficient support for the panel device 1100 to be safely suspended from any horizontally aligned support structure.
圖25B顯示適合將該平板裝置1100懸掛於垂直對準的支撐結構(譬如,牆壁)上的吊具實施。詳言之,吊具1910可被機械地附著至一牆壁或其它垂直的支撐結構。吊具1910然後可如牆壁安裝座之類者被用來將懸掛該平板裝置1100。以此方式,該平板裝置1100可如一用於視覺內容的視覺顯示器,或用於靜態影像(譬如照片、藝術品、及類此者)的壁掛件之類者被用來呈現視覺內容物。 Figure 25B shows a spreader implementation suitable for suspending the tablet device 1100 on a vertically aligned support structure (e.g., a wall). In particular, the spreader 1910 can be mechanically attached to a wall or other vertical support structure. The spreader 1910 can then be used to suspend the tablet device 1100, such as a wall mount. In this manner, the tablet device 1100 can be used to present visual content, such as a visual display for visual content, or a wall mount for still images such as photos, artwork, and the like.
圖26A-26B顯示該三角支撐結構1700可被用作為一把手的配置2000。藉由摺疊該片段式蓋子組件1300使得該等片段部分彼此相互作用以形成可被用作為把手的三角形支撐結構。因此,該平板裝置1100可以像一個人拿起一本書來看一般地被拿起來。該片段式蓋子組件1300的本體可提供方便的抓握構造,其可在該三角支撐結構被用來如一本書般地拿著該平板裝置1100時更牢靠地握住該三角支撐結構1700。 26A-26B show that the triangular support structure 1700 can be used as a handle configuration 2000. By folding the segmented lid assembly 1300, the segments portion interact with one another to form a triangular support structure that can be used as a handle. Therefore, the tablet device 1100 can be picked up as if a person picked up a book. The body of the segmented lid assembly 1300 can provide a convenient grip configuration that can hold the triangular support structure 1700 more securely when the triangular support structure is used to hold the tablet device 1100 as a book.
在該平板裝置1100包括影像拍攝裝置(譬如,面向前方的照相機2002及面向後方的照相機2004)的例子中,視覺內容可被該平板裝置 1100呈現。以此方式,該三角支撐結構1700可如一相機握把般地被用作為一握持件。因此,該三角支撐結構1700可提供方便且有效的機構,其在影像拍攝過程中提供幫助。例如,當該平板裝置1100被用來拍攝影像時,該平板裝置1100可藉由該三角支撐結構1700而被穩穩地握持且該面向後的照相機2004可被指向一物件。該物件的影像然後可被如圖25B所示地被呈現在該平板裝置1100的顯示器上。以此方式,該面向前方的照相機2002及/或該面向後方的照相機2004可被用來拍攝靜態影像或視訊,譬如視訊聊天中,或單純地觀看視訊演出。作為視訊聊天的一部分,一虛擬聊天的參與者可在使用該三角支撐結構1700來握持該平板裝置1100的同時輕易地進行一視訊交談。 In the example where the tablet device 1100 includes an image capturing device (for example, a front facing camera 2002 and a rear facing camera 2004), the visual content can be used by the tablet device. Presented at 1100. In this manner, the triangular support structure 1700 can be used as a grip as a camera grip. Thus, the triangular support structure 1700 can provide a convenient and efficient mechanism that assists during image capture. For example, when the tablet device 1100 is used to capture an image, the tablet device 1100 can be stably held by the triangular support structure 1700 and the rearward facing camera 2004 can be pointed to an object. An image of the object can then be presented on the display of the tablet device 1100 as shown in Figure 25B. In this manner, the forward facing camera 2002 and/or the rear facing camera 2004 can be used to capture still images or video, such as in a video chat, or simply to view a video presentation. As part of the video chat, a virtual chat participant can easily perform a video conversation while using the triangular support structure 1700 to hold the tablet device 1100.
圖27A-27C顯示該蓋子組件1300及該平板裝置1100的形態2100,其顯示出被稱為該平板裝置1100的偷窺模式操作的情況。詳言之,當片段1304從該玻璃蓋1106上被掀起來時,在該平板裝置1100內的感測器可偵測到該片段1304且只有該片段1304從該玻璃層1106被掀起來。一但偵測到時,該平板裝置1100可以只激活該顯示器之被外露的部分2102。例如,該平板裝置1100可運用霍耳效應感測器來偵測該片段1304已從該玻璃蓋1106上被掀起來。額外的感測器(譬如,光學感測器)可偵測是否只有片段1304被掀起或是否有額外的片段被掀起來。 27A-27C show the cover assembly 1300 and the form 2100 of the tablet device 1100 showing a voyeur mode operation referred to as the tablet device 1100. In particular, when the segment 1304 is picked up from the glass cover 1106, the sensor within the tablet device 1100 can detect the segment 1304 and only the segment 1304 is picked up from the glass layer 1106. Once detected, the tablet device 1100 can activate only the exposed portion 2102 of the display. For example, the tablet device 1100 can utilize a Hall effect sensor to detect that the segment 1304 has been picked up from the glass cover 1106. Additional sensors (eg, optical sensors) can detect if only segment 1304 is picked up or if additional segments are picked up.
如圖27B所示,當該平板裝置1100決定只有片段1304被掀起來時,該平板裝置1100可將操作狀態改變為“偷窺”狀態,在偷窺狀態中該顯示器外露的部分2102呈現圖像(icon)2104形式的視覺內容。因此,視覺內容形式的資訊(譬如,時間、日期、筆記等等)可被提供,用以只在該顯示器之可觀看的部分觀看。一但感測器偵測到該片段1304被放回到該玻璃層1106上時,該平板裝置1100可回復到之前的操作狀態,譬如休眠狀態。再者,在另一實施例中,當一被設置來回應觸碰的圖像被顯示時,則觸碰敏感層之對應於該顯示器之可看到的部分的部 分亦可被激活。 As shown in FIG. 27B, when the tablet device 1100 decides that only the segment 1304 is picked up, the tablet device 1100 can change the operation state to a "peeping" state in which the exposed portion 2102 of the display presents an image (icon) ) Visual content in the form of 2104. Thus, information in the form of visual content (e.g., time, date, notes, etc.) can be provided for viewing only in the viewable portion of the display. Once the sensor detects that the segment 1304 has been placed back onto the glass layer 1106, the tablet device 1100 can revert to the previous operational state, such as a sleep state. Moreover, in another embodiment, when an image set to respond to the touch is displayed, the portion of the sensitive layer corresponding to the visible portion of the display is touched. Points can also be activated.
再者,如圖27C所示,當額外的片段從該覆蓋玻璃1106被掀起來以進一步露出複蓋玻璃1106的第二部分2106時,該顯示器的第二部分2106可被激活。以此方式,在該“擴大的”偷窺模式中,額外的視覺資訊(譬如,圖像2108)可被呈現在該顯示器之被激活的部分上。應指出的是,當片段從覆蓋玻璃1106被掀起時,該顯示器之額外的片段可被激活。以此方式,可提供擴大的偷窺模式。 Again, as shown in Figure 27C, when additional segments are picked up from the cover glass 1106 to further expose the second portion 2106 of the cover glass 1106, the second portion 2106 of the display can be activated. In this manner, in the "expanded" voyeur mode, additional visual information (e.g., image 2108) can be presented on the activated portion of the display. It should be noted that when the segment is picked up from the cover glass 1106, additional segments of the display can be activated. In this way, an expanded voyeur mode can be provided.
或者,該平板裝置1100可在該摺片從該顯示器被移走時藉由單純的激活該顯示器及在該顯示器被該摺片覆蓋時關閉(休眠)該顯示器以回應來自該等霍耳效應感測器的訊號。在一實施例中,該等磁性元件1322的子集合(subset)可配合在附著特徵構造110內的對應磁性元件402被用來將該覆蓋組件1300固定至該平板裝置1100的覆蓋玻璃1106上。又,至少磁鐵1326可被用來激活該磁性敏感電路404。例如,當該片段式蓋子1300被放置在該平板裝置1100的覆蓋玻璃1106上時,來自磁鐵1326的磁場可被磁性敏感電路404(其可以是霍耳效應感測器的形式)偵測到。該磁場的偵測可造成該霍耳效應感測器118產生一訊號,它可造成該平板裝置1100操作狀態的改變。 Alternatively, the tablet device 1100 can respond to the sense of Hall effect by simply activating the display when the flap is removed from the display and closing (sleeping) the display when the display is covered by the flap. The signal of the detector. In an embodiment, a subset of the magnetic elements 1322 can be mated with corresponding magnetic elements 402 within the attachment features 110 to secure the cover assembly 1300 to the cover glass 1106 of the tablet device 1100. Again, at least magnet 1326 can be used to activate the magnetic sensing circuit 404. For example, when the segmented cover 1300 is placed over the cover glass 1106 of the tablet device 1100, the magnetic field from the magnet 1326 can be detected by the magnetic sensitive circuit 404 (which can be in the form of a Hall effect sensor). The detection of the magnetic field can cause the Hall effect sensor 118 to generate a signal that can cause a change in the operational state of the tablet device 1100.
例如,當霍耳效應感測器118偵測到該片段式蓋子1300與該覆蓋玻璃1106接觸時(這代表該顯示是不可觀看),由該霍耳感器118送出的該訊號可被該平板裝置1100內的處理器解譯,用以將目前的操作狀態改變成休眠狀態。在另一方面,當該片段1304從該覆蓋玻璃1106被掀起來時,該霍耳效應感測器118可藉由送出另一訊號至該處理器以回應該磁鐵1326的磁場的移除。該處理器可藉由再次改變目前的操作狀態來解譯此訊號。此改變可包括將操作狀態從休眠狀態改變至作用狀態。在另一實施例中,該處理器可藉由將該平板裝置1100的操作狀態改變至偷窺狀態來解譯由該霍耳效應感測器118以及其它感測器送 出的訊號,在偷窺模式中只有該顯示器因該片段1304掀起來而被外露的部分被激活且能夠顯示視覺內容及/或接收(或送出)視覺輸入。 For example, when the Hall effect sensor 118 detects that the segment cover 1300 is in contact with the cover glass 1106 (which means the display is not viewable), the signal sent by the Hall sensor 118 can be used by the tablet. The processor within device 1100 interprets to change the current operational state to a sleep state. On the other hand, when the segment 1304 is picked up from the cover glass 1106, the Hall effect sensor 118 can return the magnetic field of the magnet 1326 by sending another signal to the processor. The processor can interpret the signal by changing the current operational state again. This change may include changing the operational state from a dormant state to an active state. In another embodiment, the processor can be interpreted by the Hall effect sensor 118 and other sensors by changing the operating state of the tablet device 1100 to the voyeur state. The signal is that in the voyeur mode only the display is activated by the exposed portion due to the segment 1304 and can display visual content and/or receive (or send) visual input.
在一些例子中,當片段1306在同一時間從該覆蓋玻璃1106被掀起時,該霍耳效應感測器118會指出該片段1304亦被掀起,霍耳效應感測器118之外的其它感測器的存在可造成該處理器進入一擴大的偷窺模式,在該模式中對應於該顯示器被額外地露出來部分的額外顯示資源亦被激活。例如,如果該平板裝置1100包括可偵測一特定片段的存在的其它感測器(譬如,光學感測器)的話,則來自霍耳效應感測器118的訊號結合其它感測器訊號可提供該處理器一指示,即該顯示器組件的一特定的部分或一些部分目前是可觀看的且可呈現視覺內容。 In some examples, when the segment 1306 is picked up from the cover glass 1106 at the same time, the Hall effect sensor 118 will indicate that the segment 1304 is also picked up, other sensing than the Hall effect sensor 118. The presence of the device can cause the processor to enter an expanded voyeur mode in which additional display resources corresponding to the portion of the display that is additionally exposed are also activated. For example, if the tablet device 1100 includes other sensors (eg, optical sensors) that can detect the presence of a particular segment, the signals from the Hall effect sensor 118 can be provided in conjunction with other sensor signals. The processor indicates that a particular portion or portions of the display component are currently viewable and can present visual content.
圖28A顯示依據一特定實施例的蓋子組件2200。該蓋子組件2200可包括一附著至樞轉組件2204的片段式蓋子2202,其以分解圖來顯示。該樞轉組件2204可包括端凸部2206及2208,其藉由鉸鏈跨距件2210及連接桿2212(其可被包封於套管2214內,該套管被連接至或包封於該片段式蓋子2202內且看不到)而彼此樞軸地連接。以此方式,至少兩個樞轉軸線2216及2218可被提供用來樞轉地移動端凸部2206及2208、鉸鏈跨距件2210及連接桿2212。例如,鉸鏈跨距件2210(及端凸部2206與2208)可繞著樞轉軸線2216轉動而連接桿2212(及端凸部2206與2208)可繞著樞轉軸線2218轉動。應指出的是,連接桿2212及鉸鏈跨距件2210可彼此獨立地樞轉。該樞轉可同時發生或在不同時間發生,這讓該樞轉組件2204有至少四種獨立的軸轉動方向。 FIG. 28A shows a lid assembly 2200 in accordance with a particular embodiment. The lid assembly 2200 can include a segmented cover 2202 attached to the pivot assembly 2204, which is shown in an exploded view. The pivot assembly 2204 can include end projections 2206 and 2208 that are enclosed by a hinge span 2210 and a connecting rod 2212 (which can be enclosed within a sleeve 2214 that is attached or enclosed in the segment The lids 2202 are not visible inside and are not pivotally connected to each other. In this manner, at least two pivot axes 2216 and 2218 can be provided to pivotally move the end projections 2206 and 2208, the hinge span 2210, and the connecting rod 2212. For example, the hinge span 2210 (and the end projections 2206 and 2208) can be rotated about the pivot axis 2216 and the connecting rod 2212 (and the end projections 2206 and 2208) can be rotated about the pivot axis 2218. It should be noted that the connecting rod 2212 and the hinge span 2210 can pivot independently of each other. This pivoting can occur simultaneously or at different times, which allows the pivot assembly 2204 to have at least four independent axes of rotation.
為了要防止在該鉸鏈跨距件2210磁性地耦接至該平板裝置1100時金屬對金屬的接觸,標籤2220可被貼附至該鉸鏈跨距件2210的外表面上且緩衝件2222可被貼附至端凸部2206及2208的外表面上。標籤2220及緩衝件2222可用能夠承受重複與外殼102接觸而不會損傷或以其它方式傷害該外殼102的外觀的材料來製造。因此,標籤2220及緩衝件 2222可用紙、布料、塑膠來製造且藉由使用黏劑(如,膠水)而被黏接至鉸鏈跨距件2210與端凸部2206及2208。在一些例子中,該黏劑可具有能夠在有需要時輕易地更換標籤2220及/或緩衝件2222的特性。 In order to prevent metal-to-metal contact when the hinge span 2210 is magnetically coupled to the tablet device 1100, the label 2220 can be attached to the outer surface of the hinge span 2210 and the cushion member 2222 can be attached. Attached to the outer surfaces of the end projections 2206 and 2208. The label 2220 and the cushioning member 2222 can be fabricated from a material that can withstand repeated contact with the outer casing 102 without damaging or otherwise damaging the appearance of the outer casing 102. Therefore, the label 2220 and the buffer member 2222 can be made of paper, cloth, plastic and bonded to hinge span 2210 and end projections 2206 and 2208 by the use of an adhesive (eg, glue). In some examples, the adhesive can have the property of being able to easily replace the label 2220 and/or the cushioning member 2222 when needed.
圖28B顯示該樞轉組件2204的一組裝好的實施例其顯示該端凸部2206及2208及該連接桿2212(位在該套管2214內)繞著樞轉的樞轉軸線2216可轉動於兩個軸方向上(即,順時鐘及逆時鐘方向)。應指出的是,端凸部2206及2208與鉸鏈跨距件2210可相對於該輸轉軸線2218轉動於兩個軸方向上(即,順時鐘與逆時鐘方向)。以此方式,端凸部2206及2208可繞著樞轉軸線2216及樞轉軸線2218轉動於4個軸方向上。 28B shows an assembled embodiment of the pivot assembly 2204 showing that the end projections 2206 and 2208 and the connecting rod 2212 (located within the sleeve 2214) are rotatable about a pivoting pivot axis 2216. Two axes in the direction (ie, clockwise and counterclockwise). It should be noted that the end projections 2206 and 2208 and the hinge span 2210 are rotatable relative to the axis of rotation 2218 in two axial directions (i.e., clockwise and counterclockwise). In this manner, the end projections 2206 and 2208 are rotatable about the pivot axis 2216 and the pivot axis 2218 in four axial directions.
圖28C顯示鉸鏈跨距件2210,其詳細地顯示可分別被用來將該鉸鏈跨距件2210安裝在端凸部2206及2208內的端銷2224及2226。雖然在此圖中看不到,但端銷2224及2226可進一步被用來與內部插塞配合用來將包含在該鉸鏈跨距件2210內端部單元磁性元件固定。這在該等包含在該鉸鏈跨距件2210內的該等磁性元件的經過編碼的順序會造成該等端部單元磁性元件磁性地排斥相鄰的磁性元件的例子中特別有用。 Figure 28C shows a hinge span 2210 showing in detail the end pins 2224 and 2226 that can be used to mount the hinge span 2210 within the end projections 2206 and 2208, respectively. Although not visible in this view, the end pins 2224 and 2226 can be further utilized to mate with the inner plug for securing the unit magnetic elements contained within the inner end of the hinge span 2210. This is particularly useful in the example where the encoded sequences of the magnetic elements contained within the hinge span 2210 cause the end unit magnetic elements to magnetically repel adjacent magnetic elements.
圖28D顯示依據被描述的實施例的鉸鏈跨距件2210的分解圖。該等磁性元件2228可被建構成一經過編碼的磁性結構,在該磁性結構中個別的磁性元件可被安排成磁極、強度、大小等等的一特定的模式。在所示的實施例中,那些彼此相鄰接具有反向對準的(anti-aligned)磁極的磁鐵可依賴它們相互的磁吸力來保持它們在該經過編碼的磁性結構中的位置。然而,該等被設置成彼此相鄰接具有反向對準的磁極的磁性元件需要外部力量來克服相互的磁性排斥力,用以保持它們在該經過編碼的磁性結構中的位置。例如,磁性元件2281-1及2281-2每一者可用兩個具有對準的磁極的磁鐵來形成。在此情況中,形成磁性元件2281-1(及2281-2)的兩個磁鐵中的每一者將具有對準的磁極,因此將產生淨磁斥力於它們之間。因此,一外部施加的限制可藉由例如分 別使用插塞2232-1及2232-2來予以施加。磁鐵2228-3及2228-4提供的磁吸力(它們分別與磁鐵2228-1及2228-2反向對準)有助於穩定該被包封於該鉸鏈跨距件2210內經過編碼的磁性結構。用磁性鈍態材料製成的間隔件2234可被用來提供該由磁性元件2228形成的經過編碼的磁性結構額外的實體完整性。 28D shows an exploded view of hinge span 2210 in accordance with the described embodiment. The magnetic elements 2228 can be constructed to form an encoded magnetic structure in which individual magnetic elements can be arranged in a particular pattern of magnetic poles, strength, size, and the like. In the illustrated embodiment, those magnets that are adjacent to each other with anti-aligned poles can rely on their mutual magnetic attraction to maintain their position in the encoded magnetic structure. However, the magnetic elements that are disposed adjacent to each other with magnetic poles that are reversely aligned require external forces to overcome mutual magnetic repulsive forces to maintain their position in the encoded magnetic structure. For example, each of the magnetic elements 2281-1 and 2281-2 can be formed with two magnets having aligned magnetic poles. In this case, each of the two magnets forming magnetic element 2281-1 (and 2281-2) will have aligned magnetic poles, thus creating a net magnetic repulsion between them. Therefore, an externally imposed restriction can be determined by, for example, Do not use plugs 2232-1 and 2232-2 for application. The magnetic forces provided by magnets 2228-3 and 2228-4, which are oppositely aligned with magnets 2228-1 and 2228-2, respectively, help to stabilize the encoded magnetic structure encapsulated within the hinge span 2210. . Spacer 2234 made of a magnetically passive material can be used to provide additional physical integrity of the encoded magnetic structure formed by magnetic element 2228.
為了要改善整體淨磁吸力,用磁活性材料(譬如,鋼)製成的分磁器2236可被黏附至該等磁性元件2228的背端。將該分磁器2236放置於背端有助於將原本傳播遠離該鉸鏈跨距件2210與該外殼1102間的嚙合表面的磁場線重新導向。藉由將該等磁場線偏轉朝向該嚙合表面,該等磁性元件2228在該嚙合表面提供的磁通量密度可被等量地提高,用以在該等磁性元件2228與該外殼1102內的對應磁性構件間獲得增強的淨磁吸力。 In order to improve the overall net magnetic attraction, a magnetizer 2236 made of a magnetically active material (e.g., steel) can be adhered to the back end of the magnetic elements 2228. Placing the magnetizer 2236 at the back end helps redirect the magnetic field lines that originally travel away from the mating surface between the hinge span 2210 and the outer casing 1102. By deflecting the magnetic field lines toward the mating surface, the magnetic flux density provided by the magnetic elements 2228 at the mating surface can be increased by an equal amount for the magnetic members 2228 and corresponding magnetic members within the housing 1102. Enhanced net magnetic attraction is obtained.
如之前討論過的,標籤2220可被黏附至該等磁性元件2228(及間隔件2234,如果有的話),該等磁性元件然後被黏附至分磁器2236。分磁器2236可被黏附至該鉸鏈跨距件2210內的開口2238,讓該標籤2220突伸出約“d”的距離,該距離可以是約0.1-0.2mm,以防止該鉸鏈跨距件2210與該外殼1102之間金屬對金屬的接觸。 As previously discussed, the label 2220 can be adhered to the magnetic elements 2228 (and the spacers 2234, if any), which are then adhered to the splitter 2236. The splitter 2236 can be adhered to the opening 2238 in the hinge span 2210 such that the label 2220 protrudes a distance of about " d ", which can be about 0.1-0.2 mm to prevent the hinge span 2210 Metal-to-metal contact with the outer casing 1102.
應指出的是,在該鍵盤配置及顯示配置,該鉸鏈跨距件2210會因為該平板裝置1100以一角度放置在支撐表面上而受到剪力。該剪力可受到產生在該鉸鏈跨距件2210與該平板裝置1100的裝置附著特徵構造之間的淨磁吸力的抵抗。 It should be noted that in the keyboard configuration and display configuration, the hinge span 2210 is subject to shear forces due to the tablet device 1100 being placed at an angle on the support surface. This shear force can be resisted by the net magnetic attraction generated between the hinge span 2210 and the device attachment feature of the tablet device 1100.
圖29顯示該片段式蓋子2202的分解圖。底層2250可與一受保護的表面(譬如,一顯示器的覆蓋玻璃)直接接觸。底層2250可用能夠被動地清潔該受保護的表面的材料來製造。該材料以是例如微纖維材料。底層2250可附著至由彈性材料(譬如,塑膠)製成的強化層2252。該加強層2252然後可被黏附至插入件2254以形成一包括黏劑層2256、層疊 材料2258及插入件2254的層疊結構。某些插入件2254可容納被埋設的構件。例如,插入件2254-1可容納磁鐵2260,該等磁鐵2260的一部分可與埋設在該平板裝置1100內相對應的附著特徵構造合作,用以將該片段式蓋子2202固定至該平板裝置1100。至少一磁鐵2260-1可被放置及作成與包含在該平板裝置1100內的磁性敏感電路(譬如,霍耳效應感測器)相互作用的位置與大小。應指出的是,雖然某些磁鐵2260被特別地設置用以只與附著特徵構造110相互作用,但實質地所有磁鐵2260都可與埋設在用來形成不同的三角形支撐結構的片段2254-2內的磁性作用板2262磁性地相互作用。以此方式,可產生強的磁力來提供用於該三角形支撐結構的穩定基礎。 FIG. 29 shows an exploded view of the segmented cover 2202. The bottom layer 2250 can be in direct contact with a protected surface, such as a cover glass of a display. The bottom layer 2250 can be fabricated from a material that is capable of passively cleaning the protected surface. The material is for example a microfiber material. The bottom layer 2250 can be attached to a reinforcing layer 2252 made of an elastic material such as plastic. The reinforcement layer 2252 can then be adhered to the insert 2254 to form a layer comprising an adhesive layer 2256, laminated A laminate structure of material 2258 and insert 2254. Certain inserts 2254 can accommodate the embedded components. For example, the insert 2254-1 can accommodate a magnet 2260 that can cooperate with an attachment feature that is embedded within the tablet device 1100 for securing the segmented cover 2202 to the tablet device 1100. At least one magnet 2260-1 can be placed and formed in a position and size that interacts with a magnetic sensitive circuit (e.g., a Hall effect sensor) contained within the tablet device 1100. It should be noted that although certain magnets 2260 are specifically configured to interact only with the attachment features 110, substantially all of the magnets 2260 can be embedded within segments 2254-2 that are used to form different triangular support structures. The magnetic plates 2262 magnetically interact. In this way, a strong magnetic force can be generated to provide a stable basis for the triangular support structure.
額外的層疊結構可用黏劑層2256、層疊材料2258及頂層2264來形成。在一些實施例中,一材料的中介層(intervening layer)可被提供,其具有一有助於頂層2264的附著之編織結構。該頂層2264可用許多材料來形成,譬如像是塑膠、革及類此者,以維持該平板裝置1100的整體外觀及質感。為了要提供額外的結構性支撐,頂層2264可具有由強化桿2266所強化的邊緣,該強化桿可由塑膠或其它硬質或半硬質的材料形成。 Additional laminate structures may be formed using adhesive layer 2256, laminate 2258, and top layer 2264. In some embodiments, an intervening layer of a material can be provided having a woven structure that facilitates attachment of the top layer 2264. The top layer 2264 can be formed from a variety of materials, such as plastic, leather, and the like, to maintain the overall appearance and texture of the tablet device 1100. In order to provide additional structural support, the top layer 2264 can have edges that are reinforced by the reinforcing bars 2266, which can be formed from plastic or other hard or semi-rigid materials.
圖30顯示圖29的該片段式蓋子2200被放置在該平板裝置1100的覆蓋層1106上的位置的部分剖面圖。應特別注意的是磁鐵2260-1與霍耳效應感測器118的相對位置。以此方式,當片段式蓋子2200被放置在該覆蓋層1106上時,來自磁鐵2260-1的磁場可與該霍耳效應感測器118相互作用,該感測器可藉由產生一訊號來回應。該訊號接著可用一種該平板裝置1100的操作狀態可根據該蓋子2200的存在而改變的方式來予以處理。在另一方面,移走該蓋子2200可造成該操作狀態回復至先前的操作狀態,或另一操作狀態(譬如,偷窺模式)。應指出的是,介於該磁鐵2260-1與霍耳效應感器118之間的磁場密度可以是約500 高斯。然而,在該蓋子2202被翻到該外殼1102的背面的實施例中,在該霍耳效應感測器118處的磁通量密度可以是約5高斯。 30 shows a partial cross-sectional view of the position of the segmented cover 2200 of FIG. 29 placed on the cover layer 1106 of the tablet device 1100. Of particular note is the relative position of the magnet 2260-1 to the Hall effect sensor 118. In this manner, when the segmented cover 2200 is placed over the cover layer 1106, a magnetic field from the magnet 2260-1 can interact with the Hall effect sensor 118, which can be generated by generating a signal Respond. The signal can then be processed in a manner that the operational state of the tablet device 1100 can be varied depending on the presence of the cover 2200. In another aspect, removing the cover 2200 can cause the operational state to revert to a previous operational state, or another operational state (e.g., a voyeur mode). It should be noted that the magnetic field density between the magnet 2260-1 and the Hall effect sensor 118 may be about 500. Gauss. However, in embodiments where the cover 2202 is flipped over the back of the housing 1102, the magnetic flux density at the Hall effect sensor 118 can be about 5 Gauss.
圖31A顯示該鉸鏈跨距件2210在與該平板裝置1100內的裝置附著特徵構造2300嚙合中的剖面圖。詳言之,該磁性附著特徵構造2300至少包括磁性元件2302其與磁性元件2228形成一磁性電路(該磁性元件2228是包含在該鉸鏈跨距件2210內的該經過編碼的磁性結構的一部分)。分磁器2304可被用來將從該磁性元件2302傳播於一不同於該磁性元件2228的傳播方向的方向上的磁場線重新導向。以此方式,在嚙合表面2306的磁通量密度可被等量地增加,藉以提高該淨磁吸力Fnet。磁性附著特徵構造2300可被包含在該外殼1102內成為一桶2308其被作成可容納磁性元件2302及分磁器2304的大小。在所描述的實施例中,桶2308可提供該磁性元件2302及該分磁器2304支撐。桶2308亦可在該磁性附著特徵構造2300轉變於有作用的狀態與不作用的狀態之間時引導該磁性元件2302及該分磁器2304的運動。 31A shows a cross-sectional view of the hinge span 2210 in engagement with the device attachment feature 2300 within the tablet device 1100. In particular, the magnetic attachment feature 2300 includes at least a magnetic element 2302 that forms a magnetic circuit with the magnetic element 2228 (the magnetic element 2228 is part of the encoded magnetic structure contained within the hinge span 2210). The demultiplexer 2304 can be used to redirect the magnetic field lines propagating from the magnetic element 2302 in a direction different from the direction of propagation of the magnetic element 2228. In this manner, the engagement surface 2306 of the magnetic flux density may equally be increased, thereby improving the net magnetic attractive force F net. The magnetic attachment feature 2300 can be included within the housing 1102 as a barrel 2308 that is sized to receive the magnetic element 2302 and the demultiplexer 2304. In the depicted embodiment, the bucket 2308 can provide the magnetic element 2302 and the splitter 2304 support. The barrel 2308 can also direct movement of the magnetic element 2302 and the demultiplexer 2304 as the magnetic attachment feature 2300 transitions between an active state and an inactive state.
為了要確保該淨磁吸力FNET實質地垂直於該嚙合表面2306被施加,該磁性元件2228及磁鐵元件2302的磁化可被建構成它們各自的磁化向量M實質地對準。磁化一詞係指磁鐵可被製造成具有實質被對準於同一方向上的磁領域(magnetic domain)。藉由分別對準磁性元件2302及磁性元件2228的磁化向量M1及M2,該淨磁吸力FNET可實質垂直於該嚙合表面2306被產生。 In order to ensure that the net magnetic attraction F NET is applied substantially perpendicular to the engagement surface 2306, the magnetization of the magnetic element 2228 and the magnet element 2302 can be constructed such that their respective magnetization vectors M are substantially aligned. The term magnetization refers to a magnet that can be fabricated to have a magnetic domain that is substantially aligned in the same direction. The net magnetic attraction force F NET can be generated substantially perpendicular to the meshing surface 2306 by aligning the magnetization vectors M 1 and M 2 of the magnetic element 2302 and the magnetic element 2228, respectively.
圖31B顯示在無作用狀態下的該磁性附著特徵構造2300。當在此無作用狀態時,該磁性附著特徵構造2300係位在離該外殼1102的外表面至少x0的距離以滿足式(1)。因此,桶2308必能夠容納磁性元件2302及分磁器2304從無作用狀態的x=0至作用狀態的約x=x0的運動。 Figure 31B shows the magnetic attachment feature 2300 in an inactive state. When in this inactive state, the magnetic attachment feature 2300 is tethered at a distance of at least x 0 from the outer surface of the outer casing 1102 to satisfy equation (1). Therefore, the bucket 2308 must be able to accommodate the movement of the magnetic element 2302 and the demultiplexer 2304 from x=0 in the inactive state to approximately x=x 0 in the active state.
圖32顯示狀置附著特徵構造108以附著特徵構造2400的形式呈現的實施例的代表圖。詳言之,附著特徵構造2400可包括附著至板片彈 簧2406的磁性元件2402/分磁器2404。板片彈簧2406可藉由緊固件2408被直接固定至分磁器2404及藉由緊固件2412被固定端部支撐件2410。端部支撐件2410可附著至一支撐結構(譬如,外殼),以提供用於該附著特徵構造2400的支撐。在一實施例中,對準柱2414可在組裝時被用來提供端部支撐件2410及板片彈簧2406兩者的對準。圖33顯示該支撐結構2410/板片彈簧2406界面的放大視圖。 32 shows a representative diagram of an embodiment in which the attachment feature 108 is presented in the form of an attachment feature 2400. In particular, the attachment feature 2400 can include attachment to a sheet bomb Magnetic element 2402 / splitter 2404 of spring 2406. The leaf spring 2406 can be secured directly to the splitter 2404 by fasteners 2408 and the end support 2410 by fasteners 2412. The end support 2410 can be attached to a support structure (e.g., a housing) to provide support for the attachment feature formation 2400. In an embodiment, the alignment posts 2414 can be used to provide alignment of both the end support 2410 and the leaf spring 2406 when assembled. Figure 33 shows an enlarged view of the interface of the support structure 2410 / leaf spring 2406.
圖34顯示一流程圖其詳示依據被描述的實施例的處理2500。該處理藉由在2502提供在無作用狀態中的第一經過編碼的磁性附著特徵構造而開始。在2504,使用第二磁性附著特徵構造來激活該第一經過編碼的磁性附著特徵構造。在2506,讓來自該被激活的第一磁性附著特徵構造的磁場與來自該第二磁性附著特徵構造的磁場相互作用。在2508,根據該等磁場的相互作用產生淨磁性附著力。在2510,根據該淨磁性附著力將該第一及第二磁性附著特徵構造磁性地結合在一起。 Figure 34 shows a flow chart detailing the process 2500 in accordance with the described embodiment. The process begins by providing a first encoded magnetic attachment feature configuration in an inactive state at 2502. At 2504, the first encoded magnetic attachment feature configuration is activated using a second magnetic attachment feature configuration. At 2506, a magnetic field from the activated first magnetic attachment feature is interacted with a magnetic field from the second magnetic attachment feature. At 2508, a net magnetic adhesion is produced based on the interaction of the magnetic fields. At 2510, the first and second magnetic attachment features are magnetically bonded together based on the net magnetic adhesion.
圖35顯示一流程圖其詳示依據被描述的實施例的處理2600。該處理2600藉由在2602提供在無作用狀態中的經過編碼的磁性附著特徵構造而開始。在該無作用狀態中,在該經過編碼的磁性附著特徵構造中的磁性元件的一預定距離處的磁通量密度小於一門檻值。在2604,一外部的磁場在該經過編碼的磁性附著特徵構造被接受。在2606,如果判定該外部的磁場對應於與該經過編碼的磁性附著特徵構造內的磁性元件相關聯的磁性元件的話,則在2608,該經過編碼的磁性附著特徵構造被激活,否則,該處理2600即結束。 Figure 35 shows a flow chart detailing the process 2600 in accordance with the described embodiment. The process 2600 begins by providing an encoded magnetic attachment feature configuration in the inactive state at 2602. In the inactive state, the magnetic flux density at a predetermined distance of the magnetic element in the encoded magnetic attachment feature configuration is less than a threshold value. At 2604, an external magnetic field is accepted in the encoded magnetic attachment feature. At 2606, if it is determined that the external magnetic field corresponds to a magnetic element associated with the magnetic element within the encoded magnetic attachment feature configuration, then at 2608, the encoded magnetic attachment feature configuration is activated, otherwise the process 2600 is over.
圖36顯示一流程圖其詳示依據被描述的實施例的處理2700。該處理2700在2702藉由將一具有第一經過編碼的磁性附著特徵構造的電子裝置及一具有第二經過編碼的磁性附著特徵構造的配件放置成彼此靠近而開始。在2704,如果在該第一及第二經過編碼的磁性附著特徵構造內的磁性元件彼此相關聯的話,則在2706,該第一經過編碼的磁性 附著特徵構造被激活。當該第一經過編碼的磁性附著特徵構造被激活時,該第一經過編碼的磁性附著特徵構造所產生的磁場的磁通量密度提高至一高於一門檻值的數值。在該第一及第二經過編碼的磁性附著特徵構造內的磁性元件之間的磁場相互作用造成該電子裝置與該配件在2708彼此磁性地附著。 Figure 36 shows a flow chart detailing the process 2700 in accordance with the described embodiment. The process 2700 begins at 2702 by placing an electronic device having a first encoded magnetic attachment feature and an accessory having a second encoded magnetic attachment feature in close proximity to one another. At 2704, if the magnetic elements within the first and second encoded magnetic attachment features are associated with each other, then at 2706, the first encoded magnetic The attachment feature construct is activated. When the first encoded magnetic attachment feature is activated, the magnetic flux density of the magnetic field generated by the first encoded magnetic attachment feature is increased to a value above a threshold. The magnetic field interaction between the magnetic elements within the first and second encoded magnetic attachment features causes the electronic device and the accessory to magnetically attach to each other at 2708.
圖37顯示一流程圖其詳示依據被描述的實施例的偷窺模式處理2800。該處理2800藉由決定一顯示器的第一部分是否未被覆蓋而在2802開始。未被覆蓋一詞係指在該第一部分被呈現的視覺內容可被看到。當判定該顯示器的第一部分未被覆蓋時,在2804,只有該顯示器之被判定未被覆蓋的部分可呈現視覺內容。換言之,一組圖像或其它視覺內容可被顯示在該顯示器之該未被覆蓋的部分,而該顯示器的其它部分則保持空白或關閉。接下來在2806,視覺內容係藉由該顯示器之被激活的部分來予以顯示。接下來在2808,將決定該顯示器的第二部分是否未被覆蓋,該第二部分不同於該第一部分。當判定該顯示器的第二部分未被覆蓋時,該顯示器的第二部分在2810被激活。視覺內容然後在2812被顯示於該第二被激活的部分。 FIG. 37 shows a flowchart detailing the voyeur mode process 2800 in accordance with the described embodiment. The process 2800 begins at 2802 by determining if the first portion of a display is uncovered. The term uncovered means that the visual content presented in the first portion can be seen. When it is determined that the first portion of the display is uncovered, at 2804, only portions of the display that are determined not to be covered may present visual content. In other words, a set of images or other visual content can be displayed on the uncovered portion of the display while the other portions of the display remain blank or closed. Next at 2806, the visual content is displayed by the activated portion of the display. Next at 2808, it will be determined if the second portion of the display is uncovered, the second portion being different from the first portion. When it is determined that the second portion of the display is not covered, the second portion of the display is activated at 2810. The visual content is then displayed at 2812 in the second activated portion.
圖38顯示一流程圖其詳示依據被描述的實施例之用來形成一包含在該鉸鏈跨距件1340內的磁性堆疊的處理2900。該包含在該鉸鏈跨距件1340內的磁性堆疊的處理2900藉由提供一固定件(fixture)而在2902開始。該固定件具有一依據該外殼的外部形狀的形狀,該外殼的形狀界定該電子裝置,該鉸鏈跨距件將磁性地附著至該電子裝置。該固定件亦可被連接至一真空源其可後續地在2904被用來固定一保護膜。該保護膜可被用來提供保護以防止該鉸鏈跨距件與該電子裝置的外殼之間金屬對金屬的接觸。該保護膜(亦被稱為一標籤)可用彈性材料來形成且具有一與該鉸鏈跨距件的長度一致的長度。當該標籤藉由真空被固定至該固定件時,該標籤順從該固定件的輪廓,因此順從該電子裝 置的外殼的形狀。 38 shows a flow chart detailing a process 2900 for forming a magnetic stack contained within the hinge span 1340 in accordance with the described embodiment. The process 2900 of magnetic stacking contained within the hinge span 1340 begins at 2902 by providing a fixture. The fixture has a shape that is responsive to the outer shape of the outer casing, the shape of the outer casing defining the electronic device, the hinge span member being magnetically attached to the electronic device. The fixture can also be attached to a vacuum source which can then be used to secure a protective film at 2904. The protective film can be used to provide protection against metal-to-metal contact between the hinge span and the outer casing of the electronic device. The protective film (also referred to as a label) can be formed from an elastomeric material and has a length that is consistent with the length of the hinge span. When the label is fixed to the fixing member by a vacuum, the label conforms to the contour of the fixing member, and thus conforms to the electronic device The shape of the housing.
在2906,一磁鐵在一被作成順從該固定件(及該外殼)的形狀的第一表面處被附著至該標籤。在一實施例中,該標籤及該磁鐵可使用黏劑而彼此膠黏在一起。在另一實施例中,該標籤可具有一浸漬了膠水的黏性內層,其可在固化(curing)時將該標籤附著至該磁鐵。在2908,分磁器被膠黏至該磁鐵與標籤組件。該分磁器可以是用磁活性材料,譬如鋼,製成的。該分磁器可與那些來自該磁鐵之最初被引導遠離該外殼與該鉸鏈跨距件之間的嚙合表面的磁場線相互作用。該分磁器可藉由將至少一些磁場線重新引導於一朝向該磁鐵及該嚙合保面的方向上而與該等磁場線相互作用。該等被重新導向的磁場線可提高在該嚙合表面處的磁通量密度,藉以增強在該電子裝置內的磁性元件與該鉸鏈跨距件之間的淨磁吸力。 At 2906, a magnet is attached to the label at a first surface that is shaped to conform to the shape of the fixture (and the outer casing). In one embodiment, the label and the magnet can be glued to each other using an adhesive. In another embodiment, the label can have a glued inner layer impregnated with glue that can adhere the label to the magnet when curing. At 2908, the magnetizer is glued to the magnet and tag assembly. The magnetizer can be made of a magnetically active material such as steel. The magnetizer can interact with magnetic field lines from the magnet that are initially directed away from the mating surface between the outer casing and the hinge span. The magnetizer can interact with the magnetic field lines by redirecting at least some of the magnetic field lines in a direction toward the magnet and the mating surface. The redirected magnetic field lines increase the magnetic flux density at the meshing surface to enhance the net magnetic attraction between the magnetic element within the electronic device and the hinge span.
在2910,一鉸鏈跨距件包體可被膠黏至該分磁器。該鉸鏈跨距件包體可被用來支撐及保護該等用來將該鉸鏈跨距件磁性附著至該電子裝置的磁性元件。應指出的是,在附著該鉸鏈跨距件包體之後,該標籤突伸出該鉸鏈跨距件包體,這是指該標籤從該鉸鏈跨距件包體突伸出一段“d”的距離。以此方式,該金屬鉸鏈跨距件包體與該電子裝置的金屬外殼間沒有接觸。 At 2910, a hinge span member can be glued to the splitter. The hinge span package can be used to support and protect the magnetic elements used to magnetically attach the hinge span to the electronic device. It should be noted that after attaching the hinge span package body, the label protrudes from the hinge span package body, which means that the label protrudes from the hinge span member body by a " d " distance. In this way, there is no contact between the metal hinge span package and the metal housing of the electronic device.
圖39顯示一流程圖其詳示依據被描述的實施例之用來決定在一磁性附著系統中之磁性堆疊內的磁性元件的組態的處理3000。該處理3000藉由提供依據第一組態的第一多個磁性元件而在3002開始。在3004,依據第二組態的第二多個磁性元件被提供。第一及第二組態係指,該第一及第二多個磁性元件可以任何被認為適當的方式予以安排。例如,該第一及第二組態可與實體大小、磁極、磁強度、其它磁性元件的相對位置,等等有關。接下來,在3006,在一實施例中淨磁力藉由將該第一及第二多個磁性元件的每一者相對於彼此放置而被產生 。在如此作時,那些具有相同磁極的相對應的磁性元件將產生一負的(排斥的)磁力,而那些具有相反磁極的相對應的磁性元件將產生正的(相吸的)磁力。在3008,該第一及第二多個磁性元件的每一相對應的磁性元件的淨磁力將被決定。如上文中提到的,因為在同一位置某些磁性元件可產生負的磁力而其它的磁性元件則產生正的磁力,因此淨磁力的總數值可以是正的、負的、或零(代表正及負的磁力彼此抵消而沒有整體的淨磁力)。 Figure 39 shows a flow chart detailing a process 3000 for determining the configuration of magnetic components within a magnetic stack in a magnetic attachment system in accordance with the described embodiments. The process 3000 begins at 3002 by providing a first plurality of magnetic elements in accordance with a first configuration. At 3004, a second plurality of magnetic elements in accordance with the second configuration are provided. The first and second configurations mean that the first and second plurality of magnetic elements can be arranged in any manner deemed appropriate. For example, the first and second configurations may relate to physical size, magnetic poles, magnetic strength, relative position of other magnetic components, and the like. Next, at 3006, in one embodiment the net magnetic force is generated by placing each of the first and second plurality of magnetic elements relative to each other. . In doing so, the corresponding magnetic elements having the same magnetic pole will produce a negative (repulsive) magnetic force, and those corresponding magnetic elements having opposite magnetic poles will produce a positive (phase-absorbing) magnetic force. At 3008, the net magnetic force of each of the corresponding magnetic elements of the first and second plurality of magnetic elements will be determined. As mentioned above, since some magnetic elements can generate a negative magnetic force at the same position and other magnetic elements generate a positive magnetic force, the total value of the net magnetic force can be positive, negative, or zero (representing positive and negative The magnetic forces cancel each other out without the overall net magnetic force).
在3010,一全域最大淨總磁力與第一局部最大淨總磁力間的差異被決定。例如,如圖13所示,該全域最大值對應於約8A的總淨磁力(其中“A”是單位磁吸力,而“8A”等於“+8”其中“+”代表吸力)。再者,第一局部最大淨總數值約為4A及第二局部最大淨總數值約為1A。為了要避免一會造成弱磁吸力之“假激活(false activation)”,該全域最大淨總磁力與第一局部最大淨總磁力間的差異可顯示出該磁性附著系統將在該全域最大淨總磁力(其代表最強的淨磁吸力)與該第一局部最大淨總磁力(其代表作的淨磁吸力)間平衡的或然率。 At 3010, the difference between the global maximum net total magnetic force and the first local maximum net total magnetic force is determined. For example, as shown in Figure 13, the global maximum corresponds to a total net magnetic force of about 8 A (where "A" is the unit magnetic force and "8A" is equal to "+8" where "+" represents the suction). Furthermore, the first partial maximum net total value is about 4A and the second partial maximum net total value is about 1A. In order to avoid a "false activation" that would result in a weak magnetic attraction, the difference between the global maximum net total magnetic force and the first local maximum net total magnetic force may indicate that the magnetic attachment system will be the largest net total in the universe. The likelihood of a balance between the magnetic force (which represents the strongest net magnetic attraction) and the first local maximum net total magnetic force (which represents the net magnetic attraction).
因此,如果在3012,該差異是可接受的(表示該全域最大值是可能的平衡點)的話,則處理3000即停止,否則,該等磁性元件的組態將在3014被改變且控制被直接傳遞至3006作進一步評估。 Thus, if at 3012, the difference is acceptable (indicating that the global maximum is a possible equilibrium point), then process 3000 is stopped; otherwise, the configuration of the magnetic components will be changed at 3014 and control is directly Passed to 3006 for further evaluation.
圖40為一電子裝置所使用的功能性模組的配置3100的方塊圖。該電子裝置例如可以是平板裝置1100。該配置3100包括一電子裝置3102,它能夠為一可攜式媒體裝置的使用者輸出媒體,而且可對一資料儲存器3104儲存及取得資料。該配置3100亦包括一圖形使用者界面(GUI)管理器3106。該GUI管理器3106運作用以控制被提供至且被顯示在一顯示裝置的資訊。該配置3100亦包括一通信模組3108,它可促進該可攜式媒體裝置與一配件裝置間的通信。再者,該配置3100包括一配件管理器3110,它運作用以鑑定並從一可耦接至該可攜式媒體裝 置之配件裝置獲取資料。 40 is a block diagram of a configuration 3100 of a functional module used in an electronic device. The electronic device can be, for example, a tablet device 1100. The configuration 3100 includes an electronic device 3102 that can output media to a user of a portable media device and can store and retrieve data from a data store 3104. The configuration 3100 also includes a graphical user interface (GUI) manager 3106. The GUI manager 3106 operates to control information that is provided to and displayed on a display device. The configuration 3100 also includes a communication module 3108 that facilitates communication between the portable media device and an accessory device. Furthermore, the configuration 3100 includes an accessory manager 3110 that operates to authenticate and connect from a portable media package The accessory device is used to obtain the data.
圖41為一適合與被描述的實施例一起使用之電子裝置3150的方塊圖。該電子裝置3150例示一代表性運算裝置的電路。該電子裝置3150包括一處理器3152,其與用來控制該電子裝置3150的整體操作的微處理器或控制器有關。該電子裝置3150儲存與媒體項目有關的媒體資料於檔案系統3154及快取記憶體3156中。該檔案系統3154典型地是一儲存碟片或多個碟片。該檔案系統3154典型地提供該電子裝置3150高容量的儲存能力。然而,因為對該檔案系統3154的存取時間相對慢,所該電子裝置3150亦可包括一快取記憶體3156。該快取記憶體3156例如是半導體記憶體的隨機存取記憶體(RAM)。對該快取記憶體3156的存取時間比該檔案系統3154實質上短許多。然而,該快取記憶體3156並不像該檔案系統3154般具有大的儲存容量。又,該檔案系統3154在作用時消耗的電力比該快取記憶體3156多。當該電子裝置3150是一用電池組3174來提供電力的可攜式媒體裝置時,電力消耗通常是一項考量因素。該電子裝置3150亦可包括一RAM 3170或一唯讀記憶體(ROM)3172。該ROM 3172可儲存將以非揮發方式被執行的程式、供用程式(utility)、或處理。該RAM 3170提供揮發性資料儲存,譬如用於快取記憶體3156的揮發性資料儲存。 Figure 41 is a block diagram of an electronic device 3150 suitable for use with the described embodiments. The electronic device 3150 illustrates a circuit of a representative computing device. The electronic device 3150 includes a processor 3152 associated with a microprocessor or controller for controlling the overall operation of the electronic device 3150. The electronic device 3150 stores media data related to the media item in the file system 3154 and the cache memory 3156. The file system 3154 is typically a storage disc or a plurality of discs. The file system 3154 typically provides a high capacity storage capability of the electronic device 3150. However, because the access time to the file system 3154 is relatively slow, the electronic device 3150 can also include a cache memory 3156. The cache memory 3156 is, for example, a random access memory (RAM) of a semiconductor memory. The access time to the cache memory 3156 is substantially shorter than the file system 3154. However, the cache memory 3156 does not have a large storage capacity like the file system 3154. Moreover, the file system 3154 consumes more power than the cache memory 3156 when it is active. When the electronic device 3150 is a portable media device that uses the battery pack 3174 to provide power, power consumption is often a consideration. The electronic device 3150 can also include a RAM 3170 or a read only memory (ROM) 3172. The ROM 3172 can store programs, utilities, or processes that will be executed in a non-volatile manner. The RAM 3170 provides volatile data storage, such as volatile data storage for the cache memory 3156.
該電子裝置3150亦包括一使用者輸入裝置3158,它可讓該電子裝置3150的使用者與該電子裝置3150互動。例如,該使用者輸入裝置3158可以是各種形式,譬如像是一按鈕、鍵盤、撥盤、觸控螢幕、聲音輸入界面、視覺/影像攝取輸入界面、感測器資料形式的輸入等等。再者,該電子裝置3150包括一顯示器3160(螢幕顯示器)其可用該處理器3152來控制以顯示資訊給使用者。一資料匯流排3166可促進該檔案系統3154、該快取記憶體3156、該處理器3152、及該CODEC 3163之間的資料傳輸。 The electronic device 3150 also includes a user input device 3158 that allows a user of the electronic device 3150 to interact with the electronic device 3150. For example, the user input device 3158 can be in various forms such as a button, keyboard, dial, touch screen, voice input interface, visual/image capture input interface, input in the form of sensor data, and the like. Moreover, the electronic device 3150 includes a display 3160 (screen display) that can be controlled by the processor 3152 to display information to the user. A data bus 3166 facilitates data transfer between the file system 3154, the cache memory 3156, the processor 3152, and the CODEC 3163.
在一實施例中,該電子裝置3150將多個媒體項目(如,歌曲、播客(podcasts)等)儲存在該檔案系統3154中。當使用者想要讓該電子裝置播放一特定的媒體項目時,一個可用媒體項目的表單即被顯示在該顯示器3160上。然後,使用者可使用該使用者輸入裝置3158從該可用的媒體項目中選取一項目。該處理器3152在接受到一特定媒體項目的選擇時,將該特定的媒體項目的媒體資料(如,聲音檔)提供給一編碼器/解碼器(CODEC)3163。該CODEC 3163然後產生一用於揚聲器3164的類比輸出訊號。該揚聲器3164可以是該電子裝置3150內部的揚聲器或該電子裝置3150外部的揚聲器。例如,連接至該電子裝置3150的頭戴式耳機或耳機可被視為外部的揚聲器。 In one embodiment, the electronic device 3150 stores a plurality of media items (eg, songs, podcasts, etc.) in the file system 3154. When the user wants the electronic device to play a particular media item, a form of available media item is displayed on the display 3160. The user can then use the user input device 3158 to select an item from the available media items. The processor 3152 provides the media material (e.g., sound file) of the particular media item to an encoder/decoder (CODEC) 3163 upon receiving a selection of a particular media item. The CODEC 3163 then produces an analog output signal for the speaker 3164. The speaker 3164 can be a speaker inside the electronic device 3150 or a speaker external to the electronic device 3150. For example, a headset or earphone connected to the electronic device 3150 can be considered an external speaker.
該電子裝置3150亦包括一耦接至一資料鏈3162的網路/匯流排界面3161。該資料鏈3162允許該電子裝置3150耦接至一主電腦或配件裝置。該資料鏈3162可在一有線式連線或一無線式連線上被提供。在無線式連線的例子中,該網路/匯流排界面3161可包括一無線收發器。該等媒體項目(媒體資產)可以是有關於一或多種不同種類的媒體內容。在一實施例中,該等媒體項目為聲軌(如,歌曲、有聲書、及播客)。在另一實施例中,該等媒體項目可以是影像(如,相片)。然而,在其它實施例中,該等媒體項目可以是音訊、圖片或視覺內容的任何組合。感測器3176可以是用來偵測任何數量的刺激的電路的形式。例如,感測器3176可包括對於外部磁場有反應的霍耳效應感測器、聲音感測器、光感測器(譬如,光度計)、等等。 The electronic device 3150 also includes a network/bus interface 3161 coupled to a data link 3162. The data link 3162 allows the electronic device 3150 to be coupled to a host computer or accessory device. The data link 3162 can be provided on a wired connection or a wireless connection. In the example of a wireless connection, the network/bus interface 3161 can include a wireless transceiver. The media items (media assets) may be related to one or more different kinds of media content. In one embodiment, the media items are soundtracks (eg, songs, audiobooks, and podcasts). In another embodiment, the media items can be images (eg, photos). However, in other embodiments, the media items can be any combination of audio, picture or visual content. Sensor 3176 can be in the form of a circuit for detecting any number of stimuli. For example, sensor 3176 can include a Hall effect sensor, a sound sensor, a light sensor (eg, a photometer), etc. that are responsive to an external magnetic field.
該磁性附著特徵構造可被用來磁性地附著至少兩個物件。該等物件可以有許多形式且實施許多功能。當比此磁性地附著時,該等物件彼此通信及互動以形成一合作的系統。該合作的系統可實施操作並提供該等物件分開時無法獨立地提供的功能。例如,至少一第一物件及一第二物件可彼此磁性地附著,使得該第一物件可被建構來提供該第 二物件一支撐機構。該支撐機構本質上可以是機械性的。例如,該第一物件可以是一台座的形式,其可被用來將該第二物件支撐在一工作表面上,譬如一桌子上。在另一例子中,該第一物件可以是一懸掛設備的形式。因此,該第一物件可被用來懸掛該第二物件,該第二物件然後可被用作為一用來呈現視覺內容,譬如視、靜態影像(譬如,相片)、藝術作品等等,的顯示器。該支撐機構亦可被用作為一用來方便抓握或抓持該第二物件的把手。此配置在該第二物件可呈現視覺內容,譬如影像(靜態或視覺)、文字(如在一電子書中),或具有影像拍攝能力時特別有用,在該第二物件具有影像拍攝能力的例子中該第二物件可被用作為一影像拍攝裝置,譬如一靜態或視覺攝影機且該第一物件可被建構來作為一支撐件,如三角架或把手。 The magnetic attachment feature can be used to magnetically attach at least two items. The objects can take many forms and perform many functions. When magnetically attached thereto, the objects communicate and interact with each other to form a cooperative system. The cooperating system can perform operations and provide functions that cannot be provided independently when the objects are separated. For example, at least one first object and one second object may be magnetically attached to each other such that the first object may be constructed to provide the first Two objects and one supporting mechanism. The support mechanism can be mechanical in nature. For example, the first item can be in the form of a pedestal that can be used to support the second item on a work surface, such as a table. In another example, the first item can be in the form of a suspension device. Thus, the first item can be used to hang the second item, which can then be used as a display for presenting visual content such as visual, static images (eg, photos), artwork, and the like. . The support mechanism can also be used as a handle for conveniently grasping or grasping the second item. This configuration is particularly useful when the second object can present visual content, such as images (static or visual), text (such as in an e-book), or has image capture capabilities, and the second object has image capture capabilities. The second item can be used as an image capture device, such as a static or visual camera and the first item can be constructed as a support, such as a tripod or handle.
該等被描述的實施例可以有許多形式。例如,該附著可發生在一第一物件與一第二物件之間,其中該第一物件與該第二物件可以是電子裝置的形式。該等電子裝置可磁性地彼此附著以形成一合作的電子系統,該等電子裝置在該電子系統中可彼此通信。資訊可被傳送於該第一及第二電子裝置之間以作為此通信的一部分。該資訊可根據處理的本質在該第一或第二電子裝置被整體地或部分地處理。以此方式,該合作的電子系統可善用多個磁性地附著且彼此通信的電子裝置的協同作用的效果。在一實例中,該通信可使用任何適合的無線通信協定,譬如藍牙(BT)、GSM、CDMA、WiFi等等,來實施。 The described embodiments can take many forms. For example, the attachment can occur between a first item and a second item, wherein the first item and the second item can be in the form of an electronic device. The electronic devices can be magnetically attached to each other to form a cooperative electronic system in which the electronic devices can communicate with one another. Information can be transmitted between the first and second electronic devices as part of this communication. The information may be processed in whole or in part at the first or second electronic device depending on the nature of the process. In this way, the cooperative electronic system can utilize the synergistic effects of a plurality of electronic devices that are magnetically attached and in communication with each other. In an example, the communication can be implemented using any suitable wireless communication protocol, such as Bluetooth (BT), GSM, CDMA, WiFi, and the like.
該合作的電子系統可以是一陣列的電子裝置的形式。在一實施例中,該陣列的電子裝置可如一單一的整合的顯示器般地作用(馬賽克(mosaic)之類者)。在另一實施例中,該陣列的電子裝置可提供單一的功能或一組功能(譬如,虛擬鍵盤)。在又另一實施例中,該等電子裝置的至少一者可以是電力提供裝置的形式,其可藉由使用該磁性附著特徵構造被附著至該電子裝置。該電提供裝置可利用機械式連接,譬 如電力接頭,或在一些例子中一磁性的充電機構,來提供電流至該電子裝置。該電流可在提供電力以操作該合作的電子系統的同時在有必要時被用來對一電池組充電。該被提供的電力可像是一傳水桶的人龍(bucket bridge)般地從一裝置被傳遞至另一裝置以平衡該合作的電子系統中的電力分佈及電池組充電程度。 The cooperative electronic system can be in the form of an array of electronic devices. In one embodiment, the array of electronic devices can function as a single integrated display (mosaic or the like). In another embodiment, the array of electronic devices can provide a single function or a set of functions (eg, a virtual keyboard). In still another embodiment, at least one of the electronic devices can be in the form of a power providing device that can be attached to the electronic device by using the magnetic attachment feature configuration. The electric supply device can utilize a mechanical connection, A power connector, such as a power connector, or in some examples, provides current to the electronic device. This current can be used to charge a battery pack when necessary while providing power to operate the cooperating electronic system. The supplied power can be transferred from one device to another as if it were a bucket bridge to balance the power distribution and battery pack charging in the cooperating electronic system.
該配件單元包括一配件本體及一樞軸地附著至該配件本體的磁性組件其包括一第一多個磁性元件其以一第一相對尺寸大小沿著一第一直線被安排成彼此鄰接且根據交替磁極的一第一極性模式加以安排,及一第二多個磁性構件其以一第二相對尺寸大小沿著該第一直線被安排成彼此鄰接且根據交替磁極的一第二極性模式加以安排,其中該磁性組件被設置來將該配件單元磁性地附著至一主體單元(host unit)的第一部分。該第一及第二尺寸大小及該第一及第二極性模式係彼此相配互補的。該第一極性模式是{P1,P2,P1}及其中該第二極性模式是{P2,P1,P2},其中P1是第一極性及P2是相反極性。該第一相對尺寸大小順序是{2L,1L,1L}及其中該第二相對尺寸大小順序是{1L,1L,2L},其中1L是一有效的單位磁鐵長度及其中2L是該有效的單位磁鐵長度的兩倍。一2L的磁性元件包含了一由具有第一極性P1的第一個1L的磁性元件其鄰接一具有該第一極性P1的第二個1L的磁性元件構成的組態,其中該第一個1L的磁鐵及該相鄰的第二個1L的磁鐵係藉由一外部施加的力量抵抗互斥磁力而被保持在一起。該磁性組件更包含一外殼其具有一前開口及一分磁器其包封在該外殼內且附著至該第一及第二多個磁性元件的背部,該分磁器被設置來將至少一些磁場線重新引導離開該外殼的背側並朝向該前開口,藉以提高介於該第一及第二多個磁性元件與該主體單元內一相對應的磁性元件間的磁通量密度。一第一端插塞被插入到該分磁器的一第一端內及一第二端插塞被插入到該分磁器的一第二端內,其中該第一及第二端插塞提供該 被用來將該2L磁性元件組態保持在一起之外部施加的力量,其中具有相反磁極之相鄰接的磁性元件係被一相互吸引的磁力保持在一起。 The accessory unit includes a fitting body and a magnetic assembly pivotally attached to the fitting body, the first assembly comprising a first plurality of magnetic members arranged along a first straight line to abut each other and according to an alternating a first polarity pattern of the magnetic poles is arranged, and a second plurality of magnetic members are arranged adjacent to each other along the first straight line in a second relative size and arranged according to a second polarity pattern of alternating magnetic poles, wherein The magnetic assembly is configured to magnetically attach the accessory unit to a first portion of a host unit. The first and second sizes and the first and second polarity patterns are complementary to each other. The first polarity mode is {P1, P2, P1} and the second polarity mode is {P2, P1, P2}, where P1 is the first polarity and P2 is the opposite polarity. The first relative size order is {2L, 1L, 1L} and the second relative size order is {1L, 1L, 2L}, wherein 1L is a valid unit magnet length and 2L is the effective unit The magnet is twice the length. A 2L magnetic element includes a configuration of a first 1L magnetic element having a first polarity P1 adjacent to a second 1L magnetic element having the first polarity P1, wherein the first 1L The magnet and the adjacent second 1L magnet are held together by an externally applied force against the mutually exclusive magnetic force. The magnetic assembly further includes a housing having a front opening and a decouper encased within the housing and attached to the back of the first and second plurality of magnetic elements, the demultiplexer being configured to at least some of the magnetic field lines Redirecting away from the back side of the housing and toward the front opening, thereby increasing the magnetic flux density between the first and second plurality of magnetic elements and a corresponding magnetic element within the body unit. a first end plug is inserted into a first end of the splitter and a second end plug is inserted into a second end of the splitter, wherein the first and second end plugs provide The externally applied force used to hold the 2L magnetic element configuration together, wherein adjacent magnetic elements having opposite magnetic poles are held together by a magnetic force that attracts each other.
該磁性組件亦包括一第一端凸部其樞軸地連接至該外殼的一端,一第二端凸部其樞軸地連接至該外殼的一相反端,其中該第一及第二端凸部與該外殼繞著一第一樞軸線樞轉,一剛硬的連接桿其連接該第一及第二端凸部,及一套管其被作成可容納該剛硬的連接桿的大小,該套管與該剛硬的連接桿插入到該配件本體內的一開口中,該剛硬的連接桿形成一不同於該第一樞軸線的第二樞軸線,該第一及第二端凸部與該外殼繞著該第二樞軸線樞轉。該配件本體包含一片段式摺片部分其具有多個片段,其中一最外面的片段部分包括一第一磁性元件其與該磁性組件合作,用以將該片段式摺片部分磁性地附著至該主體單元的一與該第一部分分開的第二部分,其中該片段式摺片部分具有與該主體單元的該第二部分一致的大小及形狀。該第一磁性元件包含多個磁性構件。該主體單元的該第二部分是一顯示裝置其具有一最上面的保護層。 The magnetic assembly also includes a first end projection pivotally coupled to one end of the housing, a second end projection pivotally coupled to an opposite end of the housing, wherein the first and second end projections The portion pivots about the first pivot axis with a rigid connecting rod that connects the first and second end projections, and a sleeve that is sized to receive the rigid connecting rod. The sleeve and the rigid connecting rod are inserted into an opening in the fitting body, the rigid connecting rod forming a second pivot axis different from the first pivot axis, the first and second end convex portions The portion pivots with the outer casing about the second pivot axis. The accessory body includes a segmented flap portion having a plurality of segments, wherein an outermost segment portion includes a first magnetic member that cooperates with the magnetic member for magnetically attaching the segmented flap portion to the a second portion of the body unit that is separate from the first portion, wherein the segmented flap portion has a size and shape that is consistent with the second portion of the body unit. The first magnetic element includes a plurality of magnetic members. The second portion of the body unit is a display device having an uppermost protective layer.
一種形成一配件單元的方法,其包含:提供一配件本體;提供一樞轉的磁性組件;及將該樞轉的磁性組件連接至該配件本體,其包含:一第一多個磁性元件其以一第一相對尺寸大小沿著一第一直線被安排成彼此鄰接且根據交替磁極的一第一極性模式加以安排,及一第二多個磁性構件其以一第二相對尺寸大小沿著該第一直線被安排成彼此鄰接且根據交替磁極的一第二極性模式加以安排,其中該磁性組件被設置來將該配件單元磁性地附著至一主體單元(host unit)的第一部分。該第一及第二尺寸大小及該第一及第二極性模式係彼此相配互補的。該第一極性模式是{P1,P2,P1}及其中該第二極性模式是{P2,P1,P2},其中P1是第一極性及P2是相反極性。該第一相對尺寸大小順序是{2L,1L,1L}及其中該第二相對尺寸大小順序是{1L,1L,2L} ,其中1L是一有效的單位磁鐵長度及其中2L是該有效的單位磁鐵長度的兩倍。一2L的磁性元件包含了一由具有第一極性P1的第一個1L的磁性元件其鄰接一具有該第一極性P1的第二個1L的磁性元件構成的組態,其中該第一個1L的磁鐵及該相鄰的第二個1L的磁鐵係藉由一外部施加的力量抵抗互斥磁力而被保持在一起。 A method of forming an accessory unit, comprising: providing a fitting body; providing a pivoting magnetic component; and coupling the pivoting magnetic component to the fitting body, comprising: a first plurality of magnetic components A first relative size is arranged adjacent to each other along a first line and arranged according to a first polarity pattern of alternating magnetic poles, and a second plurality of magnetic members are along the first line in a second relative size Arranged to abut one another and arranged according to a second polarity pattern of alternating magnetic poles, wherein the magnetic assembly is arranged to magnetically attach the accessory unit to a first portion of a host unit. The first and second sizes and the first and second polarity patterns are complementary to each other. The first polarity mode is {P1, P2, P1} and the second polarity mode is {P2, P1, P2}, where P1 is the first polarity and P2 is the opposite polarity. The first relative size order is {2L, 1L, 1L} and the second relative size order is {1L, 1L, 2L} Where 1L is a valid unit magnet length and 2L of it is twice the length of the effective unit magnet. A 2L magnetic element includes a configuration of a first 1L magnetic element having a first polarity P1 adjacent to a second 1L magnetic element having the first polarity P1, wherein the first 1L The magnet and the adjacent second 1L magnet are held together by an externally applied force against the mutually exclusive magnetic force.
藉由提供一外殼其具有一前開口、將一分磁器包封在該外殼內、將該分磁器附著至該第一及第二多個磁性元件的背部來形成該磁性組件,該分磁器被設置來將至少一些磁場線重新引導離開該外殼的背側並朝向該前開口,藉以提高介於該第一及第二多個磁性元件與該主體單元內一相對應的磁性元件間的磁通量密度。 The magnetic component is formed by providing a housing having a front opening, enclosing a magnetizer in the housing, and attaching the magnetizer to the back of the first and second plurality of magnetic elements, the magnetic assembly being Providing to redirect at least some of the magnetic field lines away from the back side of the housing and toward the front opening, thereby increasing the magnetic flux density between the first and second plurality of magnetic elements and a corresponding magnetic element in the main unit .
當該片段式摺片部分是在該最上面的保護層之上時,沒有被用來將該配件單元磁性地附著至該主體單元的該等多個磁性構件中的至少一磁性構件被該主體單元內的一感測器偵測到。該感測器根據該片段式摺片部分相關於該保護層的位置促成該主體單元的操作狀態的改變且該片段式摺片部分是用皮革或聚氨基甲酸酯形成的。 When the segmented flap portion is over the uppermost protective layer, at least one magnetic member that is not used to magnetically attach the accessory unit to the plurality of magnetic members of the body unit is used by the body A sensor in the unit detected it. The sensor facilitates a change in the operational state of the body unit based on the position of the segmented flap portion relative to the protective layer and the segmented flap portion is formed from leather or polyurethane.
該等被描述的實施例的各式態樣、實施例、實體例或特徵可被分開地或結合地使用。該等被描述的實施例的各式態樣可用軟體、硬體或硬體與軟體的結合來體現。該等被描述的實施例亦可被體現為一非暫時性的電腦可讀取媒體上的電腦可讀取的程式碼。該電腦可讀取的媒體被界定為任何可儲存資料之資料儲存裝置,該資料然後可被一電腦系統讀取。該電腦可讀取的媒體的例子包括唯讀記憶體、隨機存取記憶體、CD-ROM、DVD、磁帶、及光學資料儲存裝置。該電腦可讀取的媒體亦可被分布在網路耦接的電腦系統上,使得該電腦可讀取的程式碼以分散的方式被儲存及執行。 Various aspects, embodiments, physical examples or features of the described embodiments may be used separately or in combination. The various aspects of the described embodiments can be embodied in a combination of software, hardware, or hardware and software. The described embodiments can also be embodied as a computer readable code on a non-transitory computer readable medium. The computer readable medium is defined as any data storage device that can store data, which can then be read by a computer system. Examples of such computer readable media include read only memory, random access memory, CD-ROM, DVD, magnetic tape, and optical data storage devices. The computer readable medium can also be distributed over a network coupled computer system such that the computer readable code is stored and executed in a decentralized manner.
為了說明的目之上面的描述使用特定的術語來提供該等被描述的實施例一完整的瞭解。然而,對熟習此技藝者而言很明顯的是,實施 該等被描述的實施例並不需要特定的細節。因此,本文中被描述的特定的實施例的上述說明是為了例示與描述的目的而被提供。它們並不是要耗盡或將該等實施例限制在被揭露的特定形式。對熟習此技藝者而言很明顯的是,在上述的教導之下有許多可能的修改及變化。 The above description is intended to provide a complete understanding of the described embodiments. However, it is obvious to those skilled in the art that the implementation The described embodiments do not require specific details. Accordingly, the above description of the specific embodiments described herein is provided for the purposes of illustration and description. They are not intended to be exhaustive or to limit the embodiments to the particular form disclosed. It will be apparent to those skilled in the art that many modifications and variations are possible in light of the above teachings.
該等被描述的實施例有許多好處。不同的態樣、實施例或實體例可獲得一或多項下面的好處。該等實施例的許多特徵及好處從書寫的描述中是顯而易見的,因此隨附的申請專利範圍是要涵蓋本發明的所有這些特徵及好處。又,因為許多修改及變化對於熟習此技藝者而言將很容易發生,所以該等實施例不應被侷限於所例示及描述之一模一樣的構造及操作。因此,所以適當的修改及等效物可被解釋為落在本發明的範圍內。 The described embodiments have many advantages. Different aspects, embodiments, or entity examples may yield one or more of the following benefits. Many of the features and advantages of the embodiments are apparent from the written description, and the appended claims are intended to cover all such features and advantages. Also, because many modifications and variations will be readily apparent to those skilled in the art, the embodiments are not limited to the construction and operation. Therefore, appropriate modifications and equivalents are to be construed as falling within the scope of the invention.
1300‧‧‧片段式蓋子組件 1300‧‧‧ Fragmented lid assembly
1302‧‧‧本體 1302‧‧‧ Ontology
1304‧‧‧片段 1304‧‧‧frag
1306‧‧‧片段 1306‧‧‧frag
1308‧‧‧片段 1308‧‧‧frag
1310‧‧‧片段 1310‧‧‧frag
1312‧‧‧可摺疊的部分 1312‧‧‧Foldable parts
1314‧‧‧插入件 1314‧‧‧ Inserts
1316‧‧‧插入件 1316‧‧‧ Inserts
1318‧‧‧插入件 1318‧‧‧ Inserts
1320‧‧‧插入件 1320‧‧‧ Inserts
1322‧‧‧磁性元件 1322‧‧‧Magnetic components
1324‧‧‧插入件 1324‧‧‧ Inserts
1326‧‧‧磁鐵 1326‧‧‧ Magnet
1328‧‧‧第一端凸部 1328‧‧‧First end projection
1330‧‧‧第二端凸部 1330‧‧‧second end projection
1332‧‧‧連接桿 1332‧‧‧ Connecting rod
1333‧‧‧樞轉軸線 1333‧‧‧ pivot axis
1336‧‧‧保護層 1336‧‧‧Protective layer
1338‧‧‧保護層 1338‧‧‧Protective layer
1340‧‧‧鉸鏈跨距件 1340‧‧‧Hinge span
1342‧‧‧鉸鏈柱 1342‧‧‧Hinged column
1344‧‧‧保護層(標籤) 1344‧‧‧Protective layer (label)
Claims (10)
Applications Claiming Priority (3)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US38417910P | 2010-09-17 | 2010-09-17 | |
US29/375,197 USD658186S1 (en) | 2010-09-17 | 2010-09-17 | Cover |
US12/971,624 US8264310B2 (en) | 2010-09-17 | 2010-12-17 | Accessory device for peek mode |
Publications (2)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
TW201512819A TW201512819A (en) | 2015-04-01 |
TWI570539B true TWI570539B (en) | 2017-02-11 |
Family
ID=49123988
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
TW103145084A TWI570539B (en) | 2010-09-17 | 2011-03-09 | Protective cover arranged to protect a display of a tablet computer and method for manufacturing the same |
Country Status (6)
Country | Link |
---|---|
JP (2) | JP5801350B2 (en) |
BR (1) | BRPI1009169B1 (en) |
GB (1) | GB2519450B (en) |
RU (1) | RU2494660C2 (en) |
SG (1) | SG10201502581RA (en) |
TW (1) | TWI570539B (en) |
Families Citing this family (6)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JP2017157015A (en) * | 2016-03-02 | 2017-09-07 | レノボ・シンガポール・プライベート・リミテッド | Input device and electronic equipment |
US10638859B2 (en) | 2016-07-22 | 2020-05-05 | Concept Workshop Worldwide, Llc | Detachable self-supporting display device |
US10327572B2 (en) | 2016-07-22 | 2019-06-25 | Concept Workshop Worldwide, Llc | Detachable self-supporting display device |
RU172855U1 (en) * | 2016-12-21 | 2017-07-28 | Михаил Андреевич Иванов | ACTIVE CASE FOR TABLET COMPUTER |
RU2738123C1 (en) * | 2020-02-18 | 2020-12-08 | Валерий Николаевич Шамайко | Stand for mobile device |
RU208192U1 (en) * | 2021-10-01 | 2021-12-07 | Публичное Акционерное Общество «Мобильные ТелеСистемы» (ПАО "МТС") | PET TRACKER |
Citations (3)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
TWI237983B (en) * | 2004-01-13 | 2005-08-11 | Benq Corp | Folding electronic device |
TW200612049A (en) * | 2004-08-31 | 2006-04-16 | Motorola Inc | Hinge apparatus and methods therefor |
TW201003513A (en) * | 2008-06-28 | 2010-01-16 | Microsoft Corp | Portable media player having a flip form factor |
Family Cites Families (18)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
JPH09146499A (en) * | 1995-11-22 | 1997-06-06 | Toshiba Corp | Information equipment |
JP2910721B2 (en) * | 1997-03-28 | 1999-06-23 | 日本電気株式会社 | Foldable mobile phone |
JPH11353283A (en) * | 1998-06-04 | 1999-12-24 | Matsushita Electric Ind Co Ltd | Portable terminal |
CN1302006A (en) * | 1999-12-29 | 2001-07-04 | 仁宝电脑工业股份有限公司 | Magnetic open and close device for portable computer |
JP2002007070A (en) * | 2000-06-22 | 2002-01-11 | Casio Comput Co Ltd | Electronic unit and storage medium storing electronic unit control program |
US7054441B2 (en) * | 2000-12-12 | 2006-05-30 | Research In Motion Limited | Mobile device having a protective user interface cover |
JP2003189145A (en) * | 2001-12-17 | 2003-07-04 | Sony Corp | Electronic equipment and cover for covering electronic equipment main body |
KR100460956B1 (en) * | 2002-07-03 | 2004-12-09 | 삼성전자주식회사 | A Keyboard of a personal digital assistant |
JP3671032B2 (en) * | 2002-08-21 | 2005-07-13 | 株式会社住友金属マイクロデバイス | Display device |
JP3673248B2 (en) * | 2002-08-23 | 2005-07-20 | 株式会社東芝 | Electronics |
CN2567694Y (en) * | 2002-09-16 | 2003-08-20 | 台均实业有限公司 | Touch control display screen with conductor lattice electromagnetic induction layer in it |
JP3811454B2 (en) * | 2003-01-29 | 2006-08-23 | インターナショナル・ビジネス・マシーンズ・コーポレーション | Proximity detection device, portable computer, proximity detection method, and program |
US7252512B2 (en) * | 2004-04-21 | 2007-08-07 | Japan Aviation Electronics Industry, Limited | Self-alignment magnetic connector reduced in size |
US7644489B2 (en) * | 2005-08-31 | 2010-01-12 | Massachusetts Institute Of Technology | Thin membrane alignment method using patterned nanomagnets |
US7583500B2 (en) * | 2005-12-13 | 2009-09-01 | Apple Inc. | Electronic device having magnetic latching mechanism |
US7775567B2 (en) * | 2005-12-13 | 2010-08-17 | Apple Inc. | Magnetic latching mechanism |
JP2010157002A (en) * | 2007-04-19 | 2010-07-15 | Alps Electric Co Ltd | Electronic device |
KR20090036190A (en) * | 2007-10-09 | 2009-04-14 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Display unit |
-
2010
- 2010-12-20 SG SG10201502581RA patent/SG10201502581RA/en unknown
- 2010-12-20 BR BRPI1009169-6A patent/BRPI1009169B1/en active IP Right Grant
-
2011
- 2011-03-09 TW TW103145084A patent/TWI570539B/en active
- 2011-03-31 GB GB1422050.3A patent/GB2519450B/en active Active
- 2011-09-19 RU RU2011138216/12A patent/RU2494660C2/en active
-
2013
- 2013-06-24 JP JP2013131999A patent/JP5801350B2/en active Active
-
2015
- 2015-07-01 JP JP2015133113A patent/JP6097794B2/en active Active
Patent Citations (3)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
TWI237983B (en) * | 2004-01-13 | 2005-08-11 | Benq Corp | Folding electronic device |
TW200612049A (en) * | 2004-08-31 | 2006-04-16 | Motorola Inc | Hinge apparatus and methods therefor |
TW201003513A (en) * | 2008-06-28 | 2010-01-16 | Microsoft Corp | Portable media player having a flip form factor |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
JP6097794B2 (en) | 2017-03-15 |
TW201512819A (en) | 2015-04-01 |
RU2494660C2 (en) | 2013-10-10 |
RU2011138216A (en) | 2013-03-27 |
BRPI1009169A2 (en) | 2013-11-12 |
JP2016006650A (en) | 2016-01-14 |
SG10201502581RA (en) | 2015-05-28 |
BRPI1009169B1 (en) | 2021-04-13 |
GB2519450B (en) | 2015-06-24 |
JP2014002749A (en) | 2014-01-09 |
GB2519450A (en) | 2015-04-22 |
JP5801350B2 (en) | 2015-10-28 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
TWI468904B (en) | Protective cover arranged to protect a display of a tablet computer and method for manufacturing the same | |
TWI462460B (en) | Electronic device with magnetic attachment | |
US20200273613A1 (en) | Cover for an electronic device | |
US8648679B2 (en) | Tablet device having a display operable in peek mode | |
US8576031B2 (en) | Consumer product system | |
US8665044B2 (en) | Cover for an electronic device | |
KR101190391B1 (en) | Accessory unit, protective cover, and detachable accessory device | |
TWI570539B (en) | Protective cover arranged to protect a display of a tablet computer and method for manufacturing the same |